Home
        LOGOS User Manual 2.39
         Contents
1.                            154   12 1  Using Risk Analysis in knowledgeToolS        ssssssunssnunsnrnnsnrnnenrnnsrrnnerenrerrnns 154   12 2  Entering  PFODADINTIES ccetcsvencsatenatavecanensiedonasauedanensianenedaeinnceerdincaprednaceune 154   12  Using Expected Val O airin rr riris r itok rinn TEAREN AUN EIRAN EUNETAN EENT 158   124  Additional FUNCHON S mecca cecter ten ronnen arRo LONNEN 161   13  Using the Calculator Module with knowledgeTOools          sccccccceeeseeesnnnnes 163   13 1  Configuring Calculations   Creating Formula Fields          ccccceseesseeeeeeeeseeees 163   13 2  Possible Calculation Operations ANd FUNCTIONS          ccceeeeeeeeeeteeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 165  13 A N  mencal AUS Sree caer succeeeeexceg Sea hoes tampeng ances eerste EN 165  MZ  MeV INN NS E are ect eet ee een E eee arrestee ee 165  13 2 3  Possible Calculation Operations and Notation             ccccceeeeee eee e ee eeeeeees 165  Toa FUNCTIONS eE lian E E EE E 166   13 3   Performing Calculations wssacsccnswiuictramiciiuennswseneiiann pia A 166   13 4  Exporting Entered Values and Calculation Results         ssssssesesesensnsrrererenrns 167   14  THES TULOFial MOQUE  sssini EARO RE NEREAREN EENE 169   14 1   resting New TUtOraAlS aisge E EE 169   14 2  Assigning Videos and Slides           ssnssussssssnssnnnssnsnssnssssnesrnnessnnssnsnenrenenrnne 171   14 3  Creating Scripts for Tutorials            ssssssssssssnssssnsnesrnnssnnnesnnnennsnnensnennenrnne 172   IAA    Viewing TUCON ANS arrrii
2.            knowledgeTools    10 2  Creating New Scripts    In order to create new scripts in a tree  you must possess structure editor rights for the  tree in question    1  Open the tree in structure editor mode and open the    Scripts    menu    2  Select the    Create script    option    3  Enter a name for the new script    4  Click on the  Save  button below   A sidebar will now appear on the right hand side of the screen with the Script Editor  This  editor can be used to create and edit the contents of scripts   The Script Editor is structured  from top to bottom  as follows    e the search field   with the search mask for searching in the script   e the toolbar   with all of the script editing options    e the display area   where the script is displayed     You can create aS many scripts as you want within a tree  In order to do so  simply    repeat the above described steps 6 and 7     Demoscript _ m    Cl search for page number Unlinked sections    ACHAL Ov Ad dD       Demoscript          Fig   The Script Editor    10 3  Creating Script Contents    When a new script is created  only the name of the script is displayed in the editor  The  toolbar above the name of the script is initially disabled  The icons that are activated in  the toolbar depend on the elements of the script that are clicked on within the course of    further editing     114      knowledgeTools    Scripts are structured documents  i e  they consist of hierarchically structured headings     referr
3.         NOTE  After the successful installation of patches  it is absolutely essential that the web    browser cache  referred to as    Temporary Internet Files     of each workstation that    accesses the LOGOS server be emptied  Otherwise problems may occur during use  as    parts of the application in the cache of the browser may conflict with the application on    the server        In order to install patches from a data storage device  proceed as follows     1   2     Click on the    Patches    tab at the top of the screen if this tab is not already active   You will see the patches that can be installed or are already installed in a window  labelled    List of installed and installable patches     Click on the  Show new  patches  button to connect to the patch server and check whether there are new  patches available  If there are new patches available  then the numbers and  names of these patches will be displayed    Click on the  Browse  button and then select the data storage device that contains  the patches in the window that opens  The patches are supplied in the form of  ZIP files  Select the ZIP file on the data storage device and click on the  Open   button     206            knowledgeTools    4  Click on the  Upload  button and the patches will be copied to the server and  installed    5  You will receive a corresponding message after the successful installation of the  patches  You must now restart the server    6  Please click on the    Server    tab at the 
4.      Please click on the   gt  icon to start the export process  If you want to delete the    import task  then please click on the Mf icon       After the successful export  the message     Completed Successfully     will be    displayed in the task window  Click on the icon to download the exported    decision       Please then click on the T icon to remove the successfully completed task from    the task window     Deleting Decisions    1  Click on the    Options    tab       Please then click on    Manage Laws and Decisions        3  Click on the selection list labelled    Please Select Court     Select the court from the    selection list where the decision that you want to delete is saved  Alternatively   you can enter the file number of the decision that you want to delete in the input    field that is below the selection list       If you select a court by using the selection list  then all of the decisions from the    court that exist in the database will be displayed  Select the decision that you  want to delete by clicking on the selection box in front of the name of the  decision  You can also select more than one decision in this way    If you enter a file number  then a decision will be displayed  Select the decision as    described above     95    8 5 5       knowledgeTools      Please then click on the  Delete  button at the bottom and the task window will    open  In this window  the delete process will be displayed as a new task that is to    be executed    
5.      ccc ccecccceeee eee ee seen eee eeeeeeeeaaanaes 110  9 4 4  Creating Links Between Nodes and Fil S            ccc cccce cece eeeeeeeeeeeeeeeennees 110  9 4 5  Deleting Links Between Files and NOES            ccccceeeeeeee eee ee eeeeeeeeaaeaees 111  9 4 6  SS SVS  Uli   FV SS anaa E i E TAA 111  10  THE SCPE EQUlOl iorra EAA ENa AARRE NONNA 113  10 1  Importing MS Word Documents as ScriptS           ssssssssssrersnrerrnrsrrnnsrrnrerenn 113  10 2  Creating New SCM Des aac cercreccencn tema tecum ics eeteeates E EEEREN 114  10 3  Creating Schipt ONGC INS crccacces cance mas ee a EE EEEa 114  10d Creating SeCUONS csemteeteneartecoceowaansmerenderetiecsueeracsuace E E a a 115  10 32  Croating Text BIOCKS iacasacesaccatiacagaseveneeenesesrsactsauemieaeserereaiacuseraanesess 115  10 3 3  Renaming Scripts and Setting LINKS             cece cccceeeeeee eens eee eeeeeeeeenees 116  10 4  Editing Existing  SCripUs  ccsscessasnsseaaversanteehisnstaewrianeuetersatestriantunbrrineseresecis 117  10 4 1  Editing Sections and Text BIOCKS            cccce seen eee eeeeeeseeeeesennnnnnneeeeesnegs 117  TOt MOVING EITI NE ercse nrc cegeneestoratriaieaasessseeeunrasaenennsaeecnen eran en nantes eases 117  10 4 3  Moving Text Blocks by Using Cut and Paste          c ccc ccccccce cece eee eeeeees 117  10 4 4  Merging Text BlOCKS issccncactectentacaserannersentestiparaustemameeternetuehonintiaeenes 117  10 4 5  Deleting Elements sririreiiririsrnrniererinri rir neri NEEC 118  10 5  Integrating Ex
6.     Upload PowerPoint slide          Upload slide  C  Durchsuchen  Upload           Fig   Uploading individual files for the creation of a new tutorial    171          knowledgeTools    You also have the option to assign several individual PowerPoint slides  in    SWF    format   to a tutorial  These PowerPoint slides should first have been converted to    SWF    format  using OpenOffice   In order to do so  proceed as follows   1  Open a PowerPoint presentation in OpenOffice   2  Make sure that the presentation only contains a single slide   3  Open the    File    menu and select the    Export    option   4  Select a location to save the file that you want to create and enter a filename   5  Select the option     Macromedia Flash  SWF     under    File Format      6  Click on  Save    You can now upload the created file to the server   1  Click on the  Browse  button under    Upload PowerPoint Slide    in order to select a  file from your computer   2  Click on the  Upload  button to upload the file   3  If you want to upload several such files  then please repeat the two previous  steps     Click on the  Continue  button to move to the next editing step     14 3  Creating Scripts for Tutorials    You can now create the script for your tutorial  When creating the tutorial script  you can    set the time in the video when you want specific events in the tutorial to be activated            knowledgeTools   Mozilla Firefox    Datei Bearbeiten Ansicht Chronik Lesezeichen Extras 
7.     click on the selection boxes in front of the names of the corresponding laws       Next  click on the  Export  button and the task window will open  In this window     the export of the law will be displayed as a new task that is to be executed       Please click on the   gt  icon to start the export process  If you want to delete the    export task  then please click on the M icon       After the successful import  the message     Completed Successfully     will be    displayed in the task window  Click on the O icon to download the exported law       Please then click on the T icon to remove the successfully completed task from    the task window           NOTE  Please note that if you export several laws at the same time  then they will be    Saved in a Single file        8 5 2     Deleting Laws          NOTE  You must possess the    Tree Admin    administrative access right in order to be able    to perform this task        KR W   N e      Click on the    Options    tab     Please then click on    Manage Laws and Decisions        Click on the button labelled  Show all acts        An alphabetically sorted list of all the laws that exist on your server will now be    displayed  You now have the option to delete one or more laws  In order to do so     click on the selection boxes in front of the names of the corresponding laws       Please then click on the  Delete  button at the bottom  The task window will open    after the successful upload of the file  In this window
8.     e Operating system  MS Windows 2000  XP or Vista  also functions with Linux  with a slightly reduced spectrum of operating functions    e Screen resolution  1024 x 768  Your screen resolution should be at least  1024 x 768 pixels   however  for optimal operation  a higher screen resolution is  recommended    e Installed web browser  Internet Explorer version 6 or later  or Mozilla Firefox  version 1 5 or later   please note that the function  Document Generation is only  available when using MS Internet Explorer    e Installed Flash Player version 8 or later  the standard Flash Player software  can be downloaded free of charge from the following address       http   www  adobe com shockwave download download cgi P1_Prod_Version Sh  ockwaveFlash amp promoid BIOW       e Activated JavaScript  The use of JavaScript must be enabled in your browser    e Accessing the LOGOS server  Your workstation must be able to access the  computer that the LOGOS server is installed on via http    The LOGOS server computer may also be the workstation    e Customized security settings  The     URL     address of your LOGOS server  Should be entered as a    Trusted site    in Internet Explorer in order to be able to  use the Document Generation function  The security level for the    Trusted sites     must be set at    Low        e Installed Microsoft Office version 2000 or later  Office is only necessary if    you intend to use the function  Document Generation    Please do not hesitate to co
9.     or    RTF    documents  for  further editing e g  in Microsoft Word   Scripts can be accessed throughout the server   the access to the individual scripts is configured in the extended system for the  administration of access rights     The Script Editor is available if the Dataroom Module is activated     2 2 3  The Document Generator    The Document Generator enables users to create complex structured documents directly  from knowledgeTools  These documents are dynamically generated from text modules on  the basis of the assigned colour markings    These documents may be individually edited prior to being published as    PDF    or    RTF     documents  When doing so the user has the option to both individually edit the text  modules from the corresponding knowledgeTool or to add new text modules     In order to use the Document Generator  you require the corresponding licence     2 2 4  The Legal Database    The Legal Database enables users to even upload laws and decisions in full text into the  database or to import laws and decisions from other LOGOS servers  These laws and  decisions can then be automatically linked in knowledgeTools  so that the users can  directly access a corresponding law or decision in full text from a knowledgeTool     In order to use the Legal Database  you require the corresponding licence     14      knowledgeTools    2 2 5  The Dossier Module    The results that are achieved with knowledgeTools are saved in processes  It is also  possible 
10.    Access Analysis on Created Supervisor   Tree Right  Read    Tree Right  Process  Processes Analysis     Supervisor   Tree Right  Read    Tree Right  Process  Analysis    P Supervisor   Tree Right  Read    Tree Right  Process   Access Graphical Process Analysis   Analysis     Access User Statistics User Admin   Supervisor   Tree Right  Read        187      knowledgeTools    17  Using Statistics    Users can access different analyses of the use of the kKnowledgeTools on the server in the     Reporting    tab   There are four types of analyses available    e the analysis of created processes   e the graphical process analysis   e the raw data analysis    e the user statistics    In order to access one of these analyses  proceed as follows   1  Click on the    Statistics    tab   2  Select the required type of analysis by clicking on it with the mouse   3  On the next page  select the tree that you want to display the analysis for and the    analysis will be displayed           NOTE  In order to view analyses  you must possess the    Supervisor    global access right   as well as the    Process Analysis    right for the respective tree  In order to be able to  access the user statistics  you must possess the    User Admin    administrative access    right        17 1  The Analysis of Created Processes    The process analysis provides an accumulated display of all processes and indicates  which nodes of a tree have been marked as  True  or  False   In addition  it shows  whethe
11.    Please click on the P icon to start the delete process  If you want to cancel the    delete process  then please click on the T icon       After the successful deletion  the message     Completed Successfully     will be    displayed in the task window       Please then click on the ff icon to remove the successfully completed task from    the task window     Importing Laws and Decisions          NOTE     You must possess the    Tree Admin    administrative access right in order to be able    to perform this task        Laws and decisions may be transferred as product files  recognized by the    KIP    filename    extension   In order to import such a product file  please proceed as follows     i  2   3     Click on the    Options    tab    Please then click on    Import Product File       Click on the  Browse  button in the window that opens and select the directory  where the product file that you want to import is saved  Select the corresponding  file by clicking on it with the mouse and then please click on the  Open  button   Please then click on the  Upload  button    The task window will open after the successful upload of the file    In this window  the import of the product file will be displayed as a new task that  is to be executed  Please click on the     icon to start the import process  If you  want to delete the import task  then please click on the    icon    After the successful import  the message     Completed Successfully     will be  displayed in the t
12.    Upload date of the file  when the file was originally uploaded to this server   Uploaded by  who uploaded the file to the server    Searchability  whether the contents of the file can be searched in with the    integrated full text search     103                E knowledgeTools       knowledgeTools   Mozilla Firefox BAX    Datei Bearbeiten Ansicht Chronik Lesezeichen Extras Hilfe    Dossiers Knowledge Tutorials Datarooms Reporting Templates Options    Filemanager wg    File Settings    Datarooms Files Va Upload Upload by Creation    ir logik pdf 239 KB 21 11 2007 Doe  John    WaemDirectory 4 logik  pdf    23       Directory B Adobe Acrobat Document    20553d0523919b565118758aa9c5cc7e09714709    21 11 2007   239 KB   John Doe   yes  2582 words   die logische grammatik der knowledgetools   2       Files of your local system    Upload of a single file     Upload     Bulk upload       Fig   The display of the file properties in the directory view    In order to open a file  click on the filename once with the right mouse button  A shortcut    menu will now appear  Click on the    Open    option in the shortcut menu with the left    mouse button     9 3 1     Finding Files    There are several options available for searching for files in datarooms     You can search for     filenames   file content  full text search in all the contents of the file    keywords  that have previously been assigned to the individual files   the creation date   the upload date    other data that has
13.    and enter the technical path of the node from which you want the creation of the table of    contents to start in the field on the right  next to it           NOTE  If you select a node other than the start node of the tree  and you then access  the dialog for creating a table of contents  the technical path of the selected node will    automatically be entered in the field        Restrict To Nodes With Supplementary Information  With this option  you can determine that only those nodes with additional information are    included in the table of contents     Include Nodes That Satisfy Only One Search Condition  If you have selected all or several of the above options for the table of contents  then  you can use this option to determine that nodes  which only fulfil one of the conditions     should also be included in the table of contents     83          knowledgeTools    8  The Legal Database    If you possess the corresponding licence on your server  then you will also have access  to the Legal Database  By using the web based editor  users can also upload laws and  decisions to the database themselves    The additional information that is contained in knowledgeTools  i e  explanatory texts   detailed texts  practice texts  etc  is automatically linked to the integrated Legal  Database  in so far as a law or decision is cited in these texts  The laws or decisions in  the texts are displayed as links  with a corresponding icon  in an abbreviated form in the     Library   
14.    e open trees for reading  if they also possess read access to the trees   see chapter 16 3 1     e create processes in trees    179         knowledgeTools    e edit the additional information of trees     but not the tree structure itself  if they    also possess the right to edit the trees  see chapter 16 3 2     16 1 3  Viewer    This authorization level has the least access rights  Users and or user groups with this  authorization level are only able to   e open trees for reading  if they also possess read access to the trees   see chapter 16 3 1     e create processes within trees    16 2  Administrative Access Rights    Administrative access rights apply for the entire server and are not restricted to    individual knowledge trees     16 2 1  User Management Admin    Users and or user groups that possess this access right are able to   e create new users and assign them access rights  e edit existing users and their access rights  e delete existing users  e create new user groups and assign them access rights  e edit existing user groups and their access rights  e delete existing user groups   The    Users    tab  and consequently access to the user administration section  will only be    displayed to users that possess this access right     16 2 2  Tutorial Admin    This access right is only available if the Tutorial Module is installed on your  LOGOS server  Users that possess this access right are able to    e create new tutorials   e edit existing tutorials  The  
15.    e the position in the tree where you want to start the creation of the process    e the layout template that you want to use to create the document that is based on   the process    e the data that you want to use from the master data of the corresponding dossier   It would be too complex if the users had to gather this information before the creation of  every single process  Therefore  this problem is resolved by the process template  which  contains all of this information  Consequently  users only require one piece of  information  namely the process template from which the new process is to be created   Process templates only have to be created once and are then available to all users that    possess read access to the tree that is referred to in the template           NOTE  In order to create process templates  you must possess the    Supervisor    global    access right        In order to create a process template  proceed as follows    1  Click on the    Templates    tab    2  If you are creating a template on the server for the first time  then you must first  create the directory where you want the new template to be saved  In order to do  so  click on the  New Directory  button  then enter a name for the new directory  that you want to create and click on the  Create  button    3  Enter a name for the template that you want to create in the input field  This  name should be unique and significant so that subsequent users can immediately  recognize the template  
16.    knowledgeTools    LOGOS    Release 2 39    User Manual      knowledgeTools    Table of Contents    1  System REGUIFEINGINES ssnin NEE 10  2  An Introduction to Working With knowledgeTOools        ssscssssssssseeeeeeneneees 11  2 1  The knowledgeTools   Method          cccccccceecceeee sees eee e eee eeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeneeeeeenegs 11  2 1 1  Wine ANID  ASSO Cla lOW oren TA 12  2 1 2  The OR ASSOCIATO oa caneseedencescccees anne vanenatenandnotananenatdnandmetananenatenaneaneeee 12  2 1 3  THe EXCLUSIVE ASSOCIA ION ccciete crass  tesa acenteanacaeiesetencidnatensiesetesideeteeces 13  2 2  The Modules of the LOGOS Server cisccsccccescccccecscecdesssesssceeesesdesssessaseseeeeees  13  PA The Dataroom ModulEsriiirirssisadidsoriniceasiandciiasua d arira Enda DL TANNA 13  2 2 2  Wie SCPE EOT aaro E E E sean 14  PGT The DOCUMeNE Generator nesrsiririsdrminnen dinna Ennn ELERNON LER DN 14  2 2 4  The Legal Database           ssssssssssssssssssssnssenrnnesnsnesnsnennsnrenessnnesnrnesnsnene 14  P oT The DOSSiSr Module oteracseeenreeentencceuetenccestencceustenceerctcnctenetenceeee ieaceeseee 15  2 2 6  The Risk Analysis Module         assssssssssnsnnnnnsnnnnsrrnnsrrnrenrerenrnrennnnsrrnnenenns 15  P i The Calculator Module  222  acenaceneccuacen minaires rindia E N R EAE 15  2 2 8  The Tutorial Module mirsiriisrseeriiiniusrirs rnin d oirr EAEOI NEONA DIVAT AD 16  2 3  The Elements of the User Interface 22   cccccccccccesccccecescecseeesceeseeuseeeseeuseesseeess 16  2 4  Navigation IN  
17.    template directory           NOTE  Depending on the configuration of the settings on your computer  the user  template directory may not be visible in Windows Explorer and you will therefore not be  able to copy the template file there  In order to display the directory  select     Folder Options    in the    Tools    menu in Windows Explorer  Click on the    View    tab in the  window that opens and scroll down to the entry     Hidden files and folders     If the    Show  hidden files and folders    option is not enabled then please enable it  Finish by clicking on  the button labelled  Apply  and close the window  The template directory will now be    visible        11 9 2  Using the Document Generator    In order to generate documents in a tree  the tree must be assigned the application type      Document Generator     in the technical tree properties    When using this application type it is possible to assign two text modules to each node of  the tree using the logical colour marking system  one text module for cases where the  node in question has been marked as    True     green  and one text module for cases  where the node has been marked as    False     red     In addition  these text modules may also contain document fields in which the user can  enter certain process related data when analysing the respective node    The actual document    builds    itself up dynamically during the colour marking of the  individual text modules  The document includes all the no
18.    to open the search window   If you want to search for a dossier by name  then enter the name in the input    field labelled    Search Term    and click on the selection button labelled    Search in    135         knowledgeTools    Filenames      If you want to search for the user that created the dossier  then enter the name  of the user in the input field labelled    Search Term    and click on the selection  button labelled    Search for Creator      If you want to search for a dossier by using the date that it was created on  then  Start by clicking on the selection button labelled    Search by Date    and then select  the corresponding date using the selection lists   If you want to search in the master data fields of the dossier  then enter the  search term in the input field labelled    Search Term    and click on the selection  button labelled    Search in Master Data     Select the master data category that you  want to search in from the selection list on the right    3  Click on the  Search  button to start the search     11 7 3  Editing or Deleting Existing Dossiers    You have the option to edit both the name of a dossier  as well as the contents of the  master data fields   1  Select a dossier from the list of your dossiers by clicking on the selection box in  front of the name of the corresponding dossier   2  Click on the  Edit Dossier  button  In the window that now opens  you can change  all the contents that are displayed in the input fields     3  Finish
19.   1  Der Wirksamkeit eines Vertrags steht es nicht entgegen  dass der Schuldner nach    275  Abs  1 bis 3 nicht zu leisten braucht und das Leistungshindernis schon bei Vertragsschluss      Untertitel 2 Besondere  Yertriebsformen    O Untertitel 3 Anpassung und  Beendigung von Yertragen    O Untertitel 4 Einseitige  Leistungsbestimmungsrechte    C  Titel 2 Gegenseitiger Vertrag  O Titel 3 Versprechen der Leistung       an einen Dritten  C Titel 4 Draufgabe  Vertragsstrafe    Titel 5 Riicktritt  Widerrufs  und      R  ckgaberecht bei       vorliegt     2  Der Gl  ubiger kann nach seiner Wahl Schadensersatz statt der Leistung oder Ersatz seiner  Aufwendungen in dem in    284 bestimmten Umfang verlangen  Dies gilt nicht  wenn der  Schuldner das Leistungshindernis bei Vertragsschluss nicht kannte und seine Unkenntnis auch  nicht zu vertreten hat     281 Abs  1 Satz 2 und 3 und Abs  5 finden entsprechende Anwendung     Verbrauchervertragen    Abschnitt 4 Erl  schen der  Schuldverhaltnisse    O Abschnitt 5   bertragung einer  Forderung    C Abschnitt 6 Schuld  bernahme      311b Vertr  ge   ber Grundst  cke  das Yerm  gen und den Nachlass  seit  01 01 2002     1  Ein Vertrag  durch den sich der eine Teil verpflichtet  das Eigentum an einem Grundst  ck zu    bertragen oder zu erwerben  bedarf der notariellen Beurkundung  Ein ohne Beachtung dieser  Form geschlossener Vertrag wird seinem ganzen Inhalt nach g  ltig  wenn die Auflassung und             E Fertig    Fig   The display of a 
20.   A file number consists of the following text components   e Senate  a Roman or Arabic numeral between 1 and 15  i e  1 15 or I XV  e Type of proceedings  1 4 letters  e Process number  1 5 letters 2 letters e g   3 98 or 10953 02    6 6 4  Citing Decrees    A decree consists of the following text components     66      knowledgeTools    e Start text    Tz       e Two digit number  e g     03 18     here again  a lower case letter may be appended  to the number  e g     8b 03       e Any text  providing it does not contain a decree name    e The name of the decree    Decrees are saved in the database as laws  therefore this is technically only a different    method to link laws     6 7  Inserting Footnotes  Click behind the text in the text input field where you want to insert a footnote and then    d  click on the icon  A pink box will appear at this position  click in the middle of this box    and enter the text of the footnote in the box     6 8  Inserting Tables  Click on the position in the text input field where you want to insert a table and then click    on the C  icon   You can now determine the properties of the table in the dialog box that appears   e Rows determines the number of rows in the table  e Cols determines the number of columns in the table  e Width determines the width of the table  you may either enter a percentage value  or an absolute value in pixels  e Alignment determines the horizontal and vertical alignment of the table  e Border Thickness deter
21.   Click on the  Create  button to move on to the next editing step     14 2  Assigning Videos and Slides    On the next page  the name of the tutorial that you have created will be displayed  Below  it  the address  URL  at which you can access the tutorial directly will also be displayed     e g  if you want the tutorial to be accessed by a link on another website     Use the  Upload Video  function to upload a video to the server from your computer   Please note that the video must be in FLV 1 1 format and that the file should not exceed  a size of 40 MB    1  Click on the  Browse  button to select the file from your computer    2  Click on the  Upload  button to upload the file to the server   Alternatively  you may also use a video that is already on the server    1  In order to do so  click on the drop down list in the line labelled      Select Existing Video        2  Select a video on the server and then click on the  Select  button     e knowledgeTools   Mozilla Firefox LK  ole    Datei Bearbeiten Ansicht Chronik Lesezeichen Extras Hilfe    Start Dossiers Knowledge Tutorials Datarooms Reporting Templates Options A amp D Users    Edit tutorial  Step 1 f  Lesson name    Demotutorial  URL for direct accesshiip   Hocalhost   knowledgetools ams Ptab trees amp tree c_produktion amp tutorial 2    Associated knowledgeTool    c_produktion    Upload video    Please set a video     Upload video  fall3 th   Durchsuchen      Upload  Select existing video    fall2 flv      Select  
22.   Dossiers    Minimum Requirement  Basic Availability    Create Dossiers Manager    Manager SSS  Supervisor SSS    Configure Master Data Supervisor    Datarooms        Minimum Requirement    Basic Availability Dataroom Licence    Dataroom Licence S  Download Datarooms as    ZIP    Files    Configure Indexing Supervisor   Write Access to Dataroom    Templates         Minimum Requirement  Basic Availability  Create Templates Supervisor   Tree Right  Read     Edit Templates Supervisor   Tree Right  Read   Delete Templates Supervisor   Tree Right  Read        185       E knowledgeTools    Calculator        Manager   Tree Right  Read     Risk Analysis        Manager   Tree Right  Read     Legal Database    Tree Admin  Tree Admin  Tree Admin  A amp D   Editor    Scripts    Minimum Requirement    Dataroom Licence  Viewer   Tree Right  Read    Script Right  Read   Delete Scripts Tree Admin    Export Scripts Tree Admin  Import MS Word Documents as  Scripts Tree Admin    Tutorials         Minimum Requirement  Basic Availability Tutorial Licence    Open Tutorials Viewer   Tree Right  Read     Create Tutorials Tutorial Admin   Tree Right  Read     Edit Tutorials Tutorial Admin   Tree Right  Read     Delete Tutorials Tutorial Admin   Tree Right  Read     Process Analyses        Minimum Requirement  Basic Availability Standard  View Process Analyses Supervisor   Tree Right  Process Analysis     186          E knowledgeTools    Statistics    Minimum Requirement  Basic Availability Standard 
23.   Enter the user name of the new user on the next page  The user will use this  name to login to the system in the future  Please note that the user name must  be an existing e mail address    3  Enter the name s  and surname of the user  as well as a password of your choice   in the corresponding fields  Due to security reasons  the password must be made  up of at least 6 characters  Re enter the password in the next line    4  You can now determine the access rights of the new user by selecting one of the  three options     Supervisor        Manager     or    Viewer     under    Global Access Rights      Please refer to the corresponding summary in the appendix for further details  concerning these authorization levels    5  If you want the new user to be granted administrative access rights  then click on  the arrow next to    Administrative Access Rights    and select the applicable access  rights  Please refer to the corresponding summary in the appendix for further  details concerning these authorization levels    6  In order to add the new user to an existing user group  click on the arrow next to     Group Affiliation     if available  all of the existing user groups on the server will  now be listed  Select the required user group s  by using the corresponding check  boxes    7  Click on the arrow next to    Access rights for knowledge areas    to grant the new  user access to existing knowledge fields  The left column of the table that opens   displays a list of the
24.   Mozilla Firefox Joe    Datei Bearbeiten Ansicht Chronik Lesezeichen Extras Hilfe    LOGOS Web Console Server Patches Logs Backup    Status of recent jobs       Server  AllegroServe 1 2 24   JA          Fig   The LOGOS web console    18 2 2  Starting   Stopping the Server    NOTE  You should only stop or restart the server if you are sure that there are no other  users working on the system  Otherwise stopping or restarting the server may result in    the loss of data     Click on the    Server    tab at the top of the screen if the tab is not already active    2  The current status of the server will be displayed in the upper part of the window   The possible statuses are     Status  Server is running    or    Status  Server is not  running       3  In order to stop the server  please click on the  Stop server  button  Please  ensure that there are no other users active on the server before stopping the  server  otherwise the stopping of the server may result in the loss of data  You  will receive the corresponding confirmation message after the server has been  successfully stopped    4  In order to start the server  please click on the  Start Server  button  You will  receive the corresponding confirmation message after the server has been    successfully started     18 2 3  Installing Patches    The LOGOS server has an integrated patch system with which you can download and  install the latest patches and bugfixes from the Internet  Alternatively  you can also    install
25.   New directories are created in the selected datarooms or directories  Proceed as follows  to create a new directory   1  Select a dataroom or directory by clicking on the name of the dataroom or  directory with the left mouse button   2  Click on the menu option     File     in the    File Manager    window and select the    New  Directory    option     3  Enter a name for the new directory and click on the  Create  button     9 2 2  Uploading Individual Files    1  Select the dataroom and the directory to that you want to upload the new file to  by clicking on it with the left mouse button     2  Click on the  Browse  button at the bottom of the screen     97    3       knowledgeTools    In the window that opens  select the file that you want to upload to the server    from your local computer and click on  Open      4  Click on the  Upload  button to upload the file to the server           NOTE  During the upload  the system attempts to read out the contents of the file so    that it can later be searched with the integrated full text search        The following file types can be searched     e Microsoft Word   e Microsoft Excel   e Microsoft PowerPoint   e Adobe    PDF     if the document contains readable text and not only  graphics    e Text documents in    RTF    format    e Text documents in    TXT    format    The searchability of other file types is under preparation     If you upload another file type  or the file is password protected  then you will be    informe
26.   Select the node that you want to move by clicking on it with the left mouse  button   Open the    Edit    menu in the menu bar     Click on    Move Node Up    or    Move Node Down        4  Alternatively  you also have the option to use the    or i icons in the toolbar     52      knowledgeTools    5 6  Creating a New Node    There are different methods for creating new nodes in the tree structure  The decisive  factor is whether the new node will be    e an original node  i e  entirely new     e acopy of a node that already exists or   e an instance of a node that already exists   When creating copies  you have the option to insert not only individual nodes  but also    entire tree sections into the tree structure     5 7  Creating an Original New Node    1  Click on the node that you want to attach a new node  child node  to     2  Open the    Edit    menu in the menu bar     3  Click on    Create New Node     Alternatively  you can also click on the     icon in the  toolbar  This function is also available in the shortcut menu     4  Anew  empty node is now created     Ul    Open the    Properties    window    6  Enter the properties of the new node  node title  alternative text and  where  applicable  colour  in the    Properties    window and then save them    7  Using the    Properties    window  click on the parent node and determine how you   want it to be logically associated with the node that has just been created or  use    the pie menu     5 8  Creating an Orig
27.   Tutorials    tab is generally visible to all users  The  New Tutorial  button will also be  displayed to Tutorial Admins at the bottom of their screen  In addition  buttons for    deleting and editing tutorials will also be displayed next to the individual tutorials     16 2 3  Tree Admin    Only users and or user groups that possess this access right can   e create new knowledge trees and    e publish knowledge trees  in so far as the users also have read access to the trees     180      knowledgeTools    e re index knowledge trees  in so far as the users also have read access to the  trees    e export knowledge trees  in so far as the users also have read access to the trees    e delete knowledge trees  in so far as the users also have read access to the trees    e execute field upgrades in knowledge trees  in so far as the users also have read    access to the trees      In addition  only users and or user groups that possess this access right can use the  following functions in the    Options    tab    e export and delete laws and decisions   e import product files  knowledge trees  datarooms  scripts  laws and decisions    e import and export    KTD    files   e export and delete scripts    e import MS Word documents     16 2 4  Laws and Decisions Admin    Users with this authorization level will be able to perform the following actions in the  integrated Legal Database    e create new laws   e edit existing laws   e delete existing laws   e create new decisions   e ed
28.   computer may also be the workstation    Customized security settings  The address     URL     of your LOGOS server  Should be entered as a    Trusted site    in Internet Explorer in order to be able to  use the functions  Document Generation and Create Table of Contents in Word   The security level for the    Trusted sites    must be set at    Low         Installed Microsoft Office version 2000 or later    Installed    ktools dot    template    In order to ensure that information can be exchanged between the knowledge tree that is    displayed in Internet Explorer and Microsoft Word  it is necessary to configure the    address of the computer that the LOGOS server is installed on as a    Trusted site    in    Internet Explorer for each workstation and to set the security level of the zone     Trusted    sites        SS Se a    at    Low     In order to do so  proceed as follows    Open Internet Explorer    Open the    Tools    menu and click on    Internet Options       Click on the    Security    tab    Click on the    Trusted sites    icon    Click on the    Sites    button    Enter the address of the computer that the LOGOS server is installed on in the  line labelled    Add this Web site to the zone    and add the extension      knowledgetools dms     After doing so  your address should read as follows      http   address_of_the_server knowledgetools dms       Click on the  OK  button    Close the window by clicking on the  OK  button     The management of the data exch
29.   however  they are available throughout the entire    server  i e  a script that has been created in a particular tree  can also be integrated in    other trees and changed in those trees  Therefore  it is necessary to manage and control    access to scripts     Access management occurs in the user administration  It is possible to determine    whether each individual user should be granted read or edit access to existing scripts     126            knowledgeTools          NOTE  In order to access the user management  you must possess the    User Admin       administrative right        Open the user administration by clicking on the    Users    tab    2  Enter the name of the corresponding user or the corresponding user group in the  respective search fields and click on  Search    Click on the name of the user or the user group  in the search results     Click on the white arrow on the right  next to    Access Rights Scripts        Scripts Read only Edit  All rights an scripts For all scripts For all scripts  Delete all Delete all Delete all  5 Demoscript    set atime limit   associated knowledge trees     Testscript    set atime limit   associated knowledge trees        Fig   The management of access rights to scripts    5  A list of all the existing scripts on the server will now be displayed  Two check  boxes are always displayed on the right  next to the name of the script  Click on  the check box in the column labelled    Read    to grant the selected user  or user  gro
30.   install the patches from a data storage device           NOTE  Users can only be informed of the availability of new patches and download the  patches if the computer that the LOGOS server is installed on has Internet access and    can establish a connection to our patch server at  Attps   secure knowledgetools de       In order to install an online update  proceed as follows     Start the LOGOS server console if it is not already open   2  If there are any patches available  then a corresponding message will be  displayed at the bottom left hand corner of the server console  see next    illustration      199          E knowledgeTools       E knowledge Tools Server Console Jog    Fie Options Backup        knowledgeTools    knowledgeTools Server Console  Version  2300  Patches  nein  Operating System Microsott Windows 2000P istat Server 2003  Lisp Version  International Allegra CL Enterprise Edition 3 1 Windows   Moy 14  2007 14 26   Copyright  23 1999 2007 knowledgeToals International GmbH Berlin      New patches available    Server ja running       In order to display a list of the available patches  click on the    New patches  available     A list of available patches will then be displayed in a new window     see next illustration      Ea knowledge Tools Server Console Updates    Search for available patches  anew patches available at https     secure knowledgetoals defupdatessAvindows 2380       patch  100 for LOGOS 2 36  file ptk23501 00 kip  initial patch      patch 
31.   option     Click on the  Open Patch Directory  button     po    In the window that now opens  select the data storage device that contains the    patches and double click on the directory that contains the patches     Ul    Confirm your selection by clicking on the  OK  button    A list of available patches will then be displayed  Install the patches by clicking on   Install New Patches     7  Once all the patches have been installed  you must then restart the LOGOS server  and the LOGOS server console  If you do not do so  there may be a loss of data   Stop the server by opening the    File    menu in the LOGOS server console and  selecting    Stop Server     Close the LOGOS server console  Restart the LOGOS  server console and start the server by selecting the    Start Server    option in the       File    menu in the LOGOS server console           NOTE  After the successful installation of an update  it is absolutely essential that the  web browser cache  referred to as    Temporary Internet Files     of each workstation that  accesses the LOGOS server be emptied  Otherwise problems may occur during use  as  parts of the application in the cache of the browser may conflict with the application on    the server        18 1 6 Creating Backups Manually    If you create a full backup  then all the contents of your LOGOS installation   i e  knowledgeTools trees  scripts  datarooms  dossiers and dossier contents  processes   tutorials and templates  as well as users and their 
32.   the deletion will be  displayed as a new task that is to be executed    Please click on the    icon to start the delete process  If you want to cancel the  delete process  then please click on the T icon    After the successful deletion  the message     Completed Successfully     will be  displayed in the task window    Please then click on the if icon to remove the successfully completed task from    the task window     94          8 5 3        knowledgeTools    Exporting Decisions      Click on the    Options    tab       Please then click on    Manage Laws and Decisions        3  Click on the selection list labelled    Please Select Court     Select the court from the    8 5 4     selection list where the decision that you want to delete is saved  Alternatively   you can enter the file number of the decision that you want to delete in the input    field that is below the selection list       If you select a court by using the selection list  then all of the decisions from the    court that exist in the database will be displayed  Select the decision that you  want to delete by clicking on the selection box in front of the name of the  decision  You can also select more than one decision in this way    If you enter a file number  then a decision will be displayed  Select the decision as    described above       Next  click on the  Export  button and the task window will open  In this window     the export of the law will be displayed as a new task that is to be executed  
33.   to open the earlier versions of the process   4  Click on the name of the process to open it  The process will then be opened in    the corresponding tree     11 8 5  Editing and Versioning of Processes    You have the option to open existing processes and  in the case of copies of processes  that are not write protected  to continue editing these processes  In this way  for  example  a user has the option to open and continue editing a process that was created  the day before  The existing process is consequently overwritten     Alternatively  you also have the option to save a process before you continue editing it     In order to do so  open the process and click on the   icon in the toolbar  This creates a  write protected copy or respectively  version of the process and of the edited version that    it contains     11 8 6  Activating Processes    While dossiers are generally activated for all users  the processes and files that they  contain are only visible for other users if you have explicitly activated them   1  Click on the    Dossiers    tab   2  Click on  Open Dossier  to access a list of your dossiers   3  Open a dossier by clicking on the    plus    sign in front of the name of the dossier   4  Select the process that you want to activate by clicking on the selection box in  front of the name of the process   5  Click on the  Activate  button below  The process  as well as any other existing  versions of the process  will now be activated  In addition  the nam
34.  101 for LOGOS 2 36  file ptk23501701 kip  Aktualisierung inaktiver Bars       patch  102 for LOGOS 2 36  file ptk23501 02 kip  Bearbeiten von Layoutvorlagen     List Installed Patches   List Available Patches   Open Patch Directory   Install Mewe Patches   i       Install the patches by clicking on  Install New Patches     Once all the patches have been installed  you must then restart the LOGOS server  and the LOGOS server console  If you do not do so  there may be a loss of data   Stop the server by opening the    File    menu in the LOGOS server console and  selecting    Stop Server       Close the LOGOS server console  Restart the LOGOS server console and start the  server by selecting the    Start Server    option in the    File    menu in the LOGOS    server console     200      knowledgeTools          NOTE  After the successful installation of an update  it is absolutely essential that the  web browser cache  referred to as    Temporary Internet Files     of each workstation that  accesses the LOGOS server be emptied  Otherwise problems may occur during use  as  parts of the application in the cache of the browser may conflict with the application on    the server        If your server is unable to establish a connection to our patch server  then you can also    install patches from a data storage device  In order to do so  proceed as follows     Start the LOGOS server console if it is not already open   Open the    Options    menu and select the    Download Patches  
35.  2 1  The Dataroom Module    The use of the Dataroom Module makes it possible to make datarooms available on the  central LOGOS server and to enable users to save and access data in these datarooms on    the basis of a tiered system of rights  LOGOS datarooms can also be searched using    13      knowledgeTools    extensive search functions  The following document types are indexed when they are  uploaded to the dataroom and can then be searched using the full text search     DOC         PDF        XLS        PPT    and    TXT     In addition  any type of document can be attributed  keywords that are freely definable in different categories  which can then be searched  for    The files that are saved in datarooms can also be linked to the individual nodes of a  knowledgeTools knowledge tree    Consequently  the content structures that are illustrated in knowledgeTools can be  directly linked in the highest resolution to information that is saved in files  In order to    use the Dataroom Module  you require the corresponding licence     2 2 2  The Script Editor    The Script Editor enables the users to create structured text documents  scripts  in a  knowledge tree and to link individual sections of this document to the individual nodes of  a knowledge tree  In addition  the users can also use the Script Editor to edit documents  that have been created in Microsoft Word and imported into the system  Scripts that are  created or edited in this way can then be exported as    PDF
36.  27  212  DISCUSSION FOURNIS arrinin ar EEE E OE a 27  2 12 1  Creating New Contributions for the FOruUm        sessssssssssnnssrnnsrrnnsrrnrenennes 28      knowledgeTools    2 12 2  Viewing the Forum Contributions of an Individual Node               cceeeee eee 29  2 12 3  Replying to Forum Contributions         ccc cc cccccce cece cece ee eee eee ee eeeeeeeee ee eeenees 29  2 12 4  Viewing the Forum Contributions for the Entire Tree       ccccccceceee eens eee eees 29  2 12 5  Deleting Forum CONtributiOns         ccc cc cccccce cece cece eee eee e eee eeeeeeeeeeeee ene nnees 29  2 12 6  Automatically Sending Forum Contributions by E Mail                cccce eee ee 30  2 43  Working With PROCESSES ii rccnccccccenadceandenadennesandenvawepaanneseccanyewanni va ndaaaneasereanas 31  2 13 1  Creating New Processes ccsccnacectc ce adas pencbews ddnabenaiiesbendddeabyossd beeeevideueedes 31  2 13 2  Saving Processes Manually             ccccecceeeeeessseceensennneeeeeeesseeeeesnennaannegs 32  2219   Opening Exis  UNg Processes axons se acceweleenceesienaoene ts LTA Tarin rA LETNIA EN NETEDE NEA 32  2 13 44  Managing PROCSSS CS ccten ret cadeeredetes rinenda ena NEENA TEPEDE NEEE DANON 32  2133 Renaming PrOCeSSES ssriorsri s nndir arkon E E NEL ENEKEL ENA EEOAE ENEON 32  2 13 6  Exporting Process Data           s srarsrsrsssrsusuastsnnnraranasunununnnrnnnannnananannnunnn 33  243 7 Deleting  A Process saatasaucvgcanpaay in tEn scene ia anoumd ance RUTA AA a 33  2 13 09  Creating a 
37.  3 4     E knowledgeTools    Norms   Start by clicking on the button labelled  Add New Norm  in the  window  Enter the section and the law separately in the respective input  fields  In order to add another norm  click on the button labelled  Add New  Norm  again and repeat the steps described above  You can also remove  individual norms by clicking on the  Remove  button under the  corresponding norm  Finish by clicking on the  Save  button to save your  entries    Official Headnote   Editorial Headnote   Operative Provisions    Facts of the Case   Reasons for the Decision   In these windows  the  user can enter the text directly into the input fields and then save the  changes by clicking on  Save     Sources   Start by clicking on the button labelled  Add New Source  in the  window  Enter the source in the input field that appears  In order to add  another source  click on the button labelled  Add New Source  again and  repeat the steps described above  You can also remove individual sources  by clicking on the  Remove  button under the corresponding sources   Finish by clicking on the  Save  button to save your entries    Lower   Higher Instances   Start by clicking on the button labelled  Add  New Instance  in the window  Select the corresponding court from the list  of courts and then enter the file number of the decision in question  Repeat  these steps in order to add more decisions  Finish by clicking on the  Save   button to save your entries    Other Decisions   St
38.  Calculation fields   _  strict colors   _  Bivalent Logic   _  Mark modules  Scripts and file shares    Select scripts                     Select file shares                   Save     Cancel a    Fig   The    Technical Properties of Tree    window             NOTE  The technical tree name is displayed in the first field in the line which is labelled       knowledge tree     It is not possible to change the technical tree name at a later stage        3 1 1  Title    This specifies the title under which the tree will be displayed in the portfolio     3 1 2  Summary Description   Description    The user has the option to automatically display a splash screen when a tree is opened   This splash screen can display information such as the title and the author of the tree   The splash screen is activated as soon as the user enters any text in the field labelled     Summary Description       In order to display a more detailed text in the splash screen  use the field labelled     Description     Click on the  Edit  button and enter your text in the window that appears     Click on the  Save  button in this window to save the entered text     3 1 3  Application Type  This determines whether any additional information is displayed at the bottom of the    client screen and the type of information that is displayed     36         knowledgeTools    The available options are     3 1 4     No Texts   there will be no windows displayed with additional information  Standard   the    Explana
39.  Cancel    Fig   The    Process Analysis    window       191      knowledgeTools    In addition  you also have the option to access two diagrams that visualize the    distribution of the individual values in this window           NOTE  Please note that the values of all the processes are used as the basis for the  calculation of the average probability of occurrence  or respectively  the average  expected value  This also includes those processes that have not been checked in the  current node  i e  where no probability has been entered  In this case  the node has a  probability of occurrence between 0  and 100     Consequently  the value    between 0  and 100     will be used for the calculation of the  average value and can therefore lead to considerable differences in the overall result  If  you do not want the probability values from the unchecked nodes to be included in the  calculation  then please select the    Ignore Not Checked    option from the    Process    menu   This setting will then be applied for the calculation of the average at all the nodes in the    tree        17 3 1  Displaying the Average Probability of Occurrence    Click on the    Probability of Occurrence Diagram    icon in the    Process Analysis    window in  order to open the diagram  The diagram displays both the average probability of  occurrence  as well as the exact values that have been entered and or calculated in the    individual processes and constitutes the basis for the calculation of 
40.  Contributions    option   2  Open the forum contributions as already described in order to read or reply to    forum contributions     The node where the respective forum contribution was created is displayed in the full text  view of each forum contribution  This information is given under the topic of the  contribution  If you click on the node title  which is marked in blue  then you can access    the node in question directly     2 12 5  Deleting Forum Contributions          NOTE  You may only delete existing forum contributions if you possess the    Forum    Admin    administrative access right        1  Open the forum     2  Click on the contribution that you want to delete     29         knowledgeTools    3  Click on the  Delete Article  button and the selected contribution  as well as any    related replies  will be deleted     2 12 6  Automatically Sending Forum Contributions by E Mail    You also have the option to automatically send all new forum contributions by e mail to a  predetermined e mail address  This e mail address can be determined for the entire  server  i e  all forum contributions for all knowledgeTools will be sent to the same e mail  address  Alternatively  it is also possible to separately determine a recipient address for  each knowledgeTool  The user also has the option to use a combination of both  variations  i e  a server wide recipient address can be determined to which all the  contributions from knowledgeTools that do not have a separate e
41.  Datei Bearbeiten Ansicht Chronik Lesezeichen Extras Hilfe       Start Dossiers Knowledge Tutorials Datarooms Reporting Templates Options    Properties  General information    Filename  logik pdf  Created on  v iv na  dd mm yyyy     Informations   Technical ID  22   Upload on  21 11 2007   Upload by  John Doe  heitkam atsolute com   Searchable  yes  2582 words    Categories    Author Peter Smith              E Fertig    Fig   The    File Properties    page    9 2 8  Deleting Datarooms    The user has the option to delete datarooms  including all of the directories and files that    they may contain           NOTE  Please note that the dataroom that you want to delete may be referred to in other  knowledgeTools on your server  These may also be knowledgeTools to which you  personally do not have any access rights  Therefore  before deleting a dataroom  please  make sure that a dataroom is no longer required by any other user    Select the dataroom that you want to delete in the dataroom view and then open the     Settings    menu and click on the    Linked Datarooms    option  A list of the knowledgeTools    with which the dataroom is linked will now be displayed        102         knowledgeTools    In order to delete a dataroom  proceed as follows     i  2   3     9 3     Select the dataroom that you want to delete by clicking on it with the mouse   Open the    Settings    menu and select the    Delete Dataroom    option    Confirm your selection by clicking on the  Delete  b
42.  Graphical Process Analysis       Contrary to with the standard graphical process analysis  the average probability of  occurrence  which is derived from all the entered and calculated probabilities of  occurrence in all the processes at this node  is displayed in a visualized form on the left    in the node     190    E knowledgeTools      E      Average probability   58 67   70 00     Average expected walue   129 666 67   140 333 335    3 Edited   by user  O Computed   by logic    3 editings at all  3 Processes at all  0 Not checked       Fig   The display of probability of occurrence      and expected value         If you move over the node with the mouse pointer  then the average probability of  occurrence will be displayed in a tooltip  In addition  you will also see how many  processes and edits the calculation is based on  If an expected value has been calculated  in the individual processes at the corresponding node  then the average expected value  that has been calculated from these values will also be displayed    If you click on the coloured bar with the mouse  you can open the    Process Analysis     window  In this window  you can view all the specific processes  in which the probability  of occurrence of the corresponding node has been derived from manual entries by users    or automatic calculations     Process analysis   First assumption  x2     x  Edited   by usert3   _  Computed   by logict     Probability chart    Expected values chart  Mot checked Os3    
43.  In the default setting    knowledgetools    is used as the prefix   Therefore the LOGOS server will then be able to be accessed using the following URL        http   your_server_name knowledgetools dms       Mail Server  If you have your own mail server  then you can enter it here  In order to  send information by e mail  e g  forum contributions or comments  from within the    LOGOS server  you must enter a mail server here     X 509  SSL  PEM File  If you want your LOGOS server to be accessible via a secure    SSL connection  then you can upload the corresponding PEM file here     Locale  You can determine the default language setting for the user interface of your  LOGOS server here  You have the option to choose between German and English  Please  note that each user then later has the option to switch to the language of their    preference     Company Name  You can enter your name  e g  the name of your company  here  The  text that you enter in this field will then be displayed on the title bar of your browser    when you access the LOGOS server     Forum Recipient E Mail  You have the option to determine a user that will be sent all  the LOGOS forum contributions in the server by e mail  This is only possible if you have  entered a valid mail server in the field labelled    Mail Server     see above   In order to  check whether e mails can be sent to the entered e mail address  click on the  Test     button  A test e mail will then be sent to the entered e mail addres
44.  Instance   e Other Decisions   The user has the option to move from one element to the next within the decision by  using the    Go To    selection list at the top  right hand corner of the screen  Only those    elements that actually exist in the decision are displayed in the selection list        knowledgeTools   Mozilla Firefox  Joe    Datei Bearbeiten Ansicht Chronik Lesezeichen Extras Hilfe       Dossiers Knowledge Tutorials Datarooms Reporting Templates Options    Decision BGH 1 ARs 1 99    Court  BGH Decision from  03 02 1999 Reference number  1 ARs 1 99 4  Goto    Redaktioneller Leitsatz Guiding Principle  Fact    Nicht wiedergegeben  Reasons for decision    Facts    Nicht wiedergegeben     Reasons for decision    I  Der anfragende Senat beabsichtigt zu entscheiden  der Begriff des  Verwendens  im Sinne von    250 Abs  2 Nr  1 StGB in der Fassung des  Sechsten Gesetzes zur Reform des Strafrechts  6  StrRG  vom 26  Januar 1998  BGBI  1S  164  sei nicht erf  llt  wenn nach den konkreten Umst  nden  der Tatsituation   in der Sparkasse befand sich die einzig anwesende Person hinter schufsicherem Glas   die Bedrohung mit einer geladenen  Gaspistole keine Gefahr einer Verletzung anderer Personen bedeute  Der Begriff  Verwenden  lasse zwar die Auslegung zu  daf jedes  Gebrauchmachen   ber das blo  e  Beisichfihren  hinaus geniige  also auch jeder Einsatz einer Waffe als Mittel der Drohung  Es bestehe aber aus der  Systematik  der Entstehungsgeschichte und dem Sinn und Zweck
45.  URL  or  using the    Tutorials    tab of the user interface     In order to use the Tutorial Module  you require the corresponding licence     2 3  The Elements of the User Interface    All the elements of the user interface have distinct names  The names of all the relevant    elements are listed below     S knowledgeTools   Mozilla Firefox    Datei Bearbeiten Ansicht Chronik Lesezeichen Extras Hilfe    Dossiers Knowledge Tutorials Datarooms Reporting Templates Options c  de   en  Log    Process Edit Scripts View Navigation Help    Demoscript ery A  BOYX7B   8 FMWOWRS   a    B Demo    Conclusion    demo   Version 43 4  Demoscript    H Part I              Part II    5 C Part III    First assumption      Conclusion Second assumption   8            Third assumption    Enel 0O em    Lorem ipsum dolor sit amet  Acts     433 BGB 5     433 BGB     242 StGB D      242 StGB    E   bertrage Daten von localhost             Fig   The user interface of the knowledgeTools client    1  Tabs  2  Main Menu  3  Toolbar    4  Navigation Bar    16    O AN OA UI       knowledgeTools      Tree Window     Knowledge Tree     Display of Tree  Process and User Name    Start Node      Additional Information Window  depending on application type of the knowledge tree     10     Library    Window with Links  11  Note Window  12  Files  Scripts and Calculator Sidebar    The system provides each user with a customized user interface  depending on their    authorization level  Viewer  Manager or Supervis
46.  and horizontally  Click on    the    or     icons in order to move a structure level one level up or down  Click    on the q or  gt  icons in order to move the selected level one level to the right or    one level to the left     Inserting Regulations    1  Select the structure level where you want to insert the regulation by clicking on it    with the mouse       Click on the    icon at the top in the right hand section of the screen and the       New Regulation    window will open       Enter either the number of the regulation or an    A    to determine that the text is    the preamble of the law  or an    E    to determine that it is the postscript       Enter the title of the regulation and enter the date from which the regulation was    valid under it  If you enter a regulation that is no longer valid  then you must also    enter the date from which it was no longer valid under it     5  Enter the text of the regulation and finish by clicking on  Save      If there are already regulations on the selected structure level  then the new regulation    will be inserted under the existing regulations  If  however  you would like to insert the    new regulation above a certain regulation  then select the regulation in question by    clicking on it with the mouse and then click on the A Icon     Editing and Deleting Regulations    1     Select the regulation that you want to edit or delete by clicking on it with the    MOUSE     Click on the T icon at the top in the right hand
47.  been assigned to a file as a keyword     When using the date search  you can determine whether you want to narrow your search    to     a specific date  e g  for all files that were created on 21 02 2001     a period before a specific date  e g  for all files that were created before  21 02 2001     a period after a specific date  e g  for all files that were created after  21 02 2001   or    104       E knowledgeTools    e aperiod with a specified start and end date  e g  for all files that were created  between 21 02 2001 and 14 05 2001     When using the search function  you can choose between a quick search and a detailed  search  The quick search is always available at the top right hand corner of the File  Manager  Enter a search term in the input field and click on the  Search  button    Any files that are found will be displayed on the right hand side of the screen    Please note that the search will always be performed in the directory that is selected at  the time  If you want to search in all the directories  then first click on the parent    dataroom and then start the search     In order to perform a detailed search  click on the magnifier icon at the top right hand    corner of the screen and a search mask will open     S knowledge Tools   Mozilla Firefox  Joe    Datei Bearbeiten Ansicht Chronik Lesezeichen Extras Hilfe    Dossiers Knowledge Tutorials  lt   Datarooms Reporting Templates Options    Filernanager a  File Settings  Datarooms Files Va Size Upload Up
48.  by clicking on the  OK  button to save your changes     In order to delete a dossier  select the dossier as described above and click on the   Delete  button  You will now be asked whether you want to delete the dossier  Click on     Delete  to delete the dossier  Click on  Cancel  if you do not want to delete the dossier           NOTE  Only empty dossiers can be deleted  Therefore  before deleting a dossier  please  make sure that neither you nor any other user have any data saved in the dossier  It is  possible that another user has saved data in the dossier  but has not activated it for you  to use  This data will therefore not be visible to you  However  if you attempt to delete  such a dossier  a message will be displayed stating the user that has saved data  which    has not been activated  in the dossier        11 7 4  Activating Dossier Contents    While dossiers are generally activated for all users  the processes and files that they  contain are only visible to other users if you have explicitly activated them  However  you    have the option to activate all the contents of a dossier at once for other users  In order    136         knowledgeTools    to do so  select a dossier by clicking on the selection box in front of the name of the    corresponding dossier and then click on the  Activate  button     11 8  Working With Processes    Processes are the central element of your work with LOGOS  Knowledge trees are  abstract and map all the conceivable steps of a pro
49.  compiles a qualified report on the problem that can then be sent to    knowledgeTools  This makes it possible to quickly identify  assess and resolve problems     209          E3 knowledgeTools    In the event of certain problems  the reporting system window appears on the user    interface as displayed in the following illustration     Report    No methods applicable for generic function    lt STANDARD GENERIC FUNCTION   YORGANGSDB   DB gt  with args  NIL  of classes   NULL      lt   SIGNAL  lt     CERROR  lt    METHOD NO APPLICABLE METHOD  Ti   lt    VORGANGSDB  REVISION TREE VERSION  lt    FLASH HTTFD IMPL    SERVE REFRESH VORGANG REQUEST  lt      INTERNAL   INTERNAL   0  0   lt    FLASH HTTFD IMPL    INVOKE WITH ERROR HANDLER  lt        INTERNAL  METHOD FLASH HTTPD IMPL  SERVE REQUEST    0   lt    FLASH HTTFD IMPL    INVOKE WITH LOCALE  lt      METHOD FLASH HTTPD IMPL    SERVE REQUEST     FLASH HTTED IMPL    VORGANG REQUEST    lt      METHOD FLASH HTTPD IMPL  SERVE REQUEST   AROUND       lt      INTERNAL   EFFECTIVE METHOD 1 NIL     0   lt    FLASH HTTFD IMPL    SERVE EXTENDED REQUEST  lt       INTERNAL LISF UTILITIES  CURRY 0   lt            This report can be sent as an e mail to knowledgeTools support  The e mail will include only  information shown here  In addition  you can add a personal comment     From     To  supporthknowledgetools  de  Subject  Report    lt STANDARD CL4ASS PROGRAM ERROR gt     Your comment        Fig   The problem report window    The upper par
50.  currently working on a  specific knowledgeTool  The condition for this is that the user in question is themself  authorized to edit the knowledgeTool    Click on the    View    menu and select the    Editors Online    option  A window will appear  with the names of the users that are currently working on the knowledgeTool    You have the option to click on the name of one of the editors and to send the user an  e mail  Please note that you will require an e mail client in order to do this    You can always update the list of users by clicking on the  Update  button  The list is not    updated automatically     2 6 3  Switching Between Normal Mode and Editor Mode    If you have the authorization to edit the currently opened tree  then you can also switch  back and forth between the normal and editor modes    In order to switch to editor mode from normal mode  open the    Navigation    menu and  click on the    Open Structure Editor    option    In order to switch back to normal mode from editor mode  open the    Navigation    menu    and click on the    Open Published Version    option     2 6 4  Adding and Removing the Elements of the User Interface    You have the option to remove individual elements from the user interface by using the     View    menu  This is particularly recommended when working with lower screen  resolutions   In the default version  the first four items in this menu are activated  marked by a tick    By clicking on the corresponding options  it is pos
51.  der Vorschrift die Notwendigkeit einer restriktiven S4uslegung  Nach den konkreten  Umst  nden verbiete sich im zu entscheidenden Fall bei wertender Betrachtung die Annahme eines  vollendeten  schweren Raubes nach    250 Abs  2  Nr  1 StGB nF mangels einer Tathandlung  die unter das Tatbestandsmerkmal  verwenden  subsumiert werden k  nne  Der 4  Strafsenat sieht sich in  seiner Entscheidung gehindert durch den Beschlu   des 1  Strafsenats vom 17  Juni 1998   1 StR 270 98    Stv 1998  487      II  Der vom 4  Strafsenat beabsichtigten Auslegung des Verwendungsbeoriffs vermag der Senat nicht zu folgen     1  Das  Verwenden  iSv    250 Abs  2 Nr  1 StGB nF stellt keine eigenst  ndige Tathandlung dar  die einer gesonderten   sei es einengenden  sei es  erweiternden   4uslegung zug  nglich ist  Denn nach der gesetzgeberischen Konzeption der Raubdelikte bezieht sich das  Verwenden  auf den  Einsatz der Tatmittel im Grundtatbestand     249 Abs  1 StGB   Das bedeutet  dah immer dann ein  Verwenden  als Qualifikation vorliegt  wenn der  Tater zur Wegnahme einer fremden beweglichen Sache eine  Waffe oder ein anderes gef  hrliches Werkzeug  gerade als Mittel der  Gewalt gegen  eine Person  gebraucht oder als Mittel der  Anwendung von Drohungen mit gegenwartiger Gefahr f  r Leib oder Leben  benutzt        2  Eine einengende Auslegung des Begriffs  Verwenden  l    t sich auch nicht aus der Entstehungsgeschichte des    250 StGB nF herleiten  In der  Begr  ndung des Gesetzentwurfs der Bunde
52.  document will be displayed first    The tab of the second document that also contains a linked text section will be coloured  blue  If you click on the tab  then the linked text section in the document will be  displayed    If you are navigating through the files in the sidebar  rather than the tree  then the  sections in the texts that are linked to a node are indicated by a blue arrow at the  beginning of the section  Click on the blue arrow to access the node that the section is  linked to    If the text section is linked to several nodes  then a selection window will open if you  click on the blue arrow  All the nodes that are linked to the text section will be displayed  in this selection window  In order to display one of these nodes  simply click on the node  title     10 6 1  Opening Texts    The texts in the sidebar are displayed in a hierarchical structure in accordance with the    document structure  The headings are highlighted in blue     119      knowledgeTools    If a heading has a sub heading  then a    plus    sign will be displayed in front of the  heading  Click on the    plus    sign to open the document structure and display the  Ssub headings    In order to access the text contained under a heading  click on the heading  If you click    on the heading a second time  the text will disappear again           NOTE  Some headings contain sub headings  but no text of their own  In this case  the  Subordinate document structure will open when you click on the 
53.  dossier and  automatically save the process in this new dossier     If you want to save the process in an existing dossier  then please select the    138      knowledgeTools    corresponding dossier from the    Select Dossier    selection list    If you want to save the process in a new dossier  then please enter the name of   the new dossier that you want to create in the input field labelled    New Dossier      6  Finally  click on the  Save  button and the process will then be automatically    saved in the background and you will be able to continue working normally           NOTE  Please note that when working with knowledge trees that are used to generate  documents  the described method does not allow you to select a layout template for the  creation of the document  In such cases  the document will be created on the basis of a    Standard layout template        11 8 3  Searching for Existing Processes    You have the option to search for processes in the dossiers on your server  In this case   you can search for the name of the process  the date that it was created on and or the  name of the user that created the process   1  Click on the    Dossiers    tab   2  Click on    Search Dossiers    to open the search window   If you want to search for a process by using its name  then enter the name in the  input field labelled    Search Term    and click on the selection button labelled     Search in Filenames      If you want to search for the user that created the proces
54.  existing knowledge fields  trees  on the server  The access  rights to each tree are granted separately  There are three columns with check  boxes next to the name of each tree  By using these check boxes  you can  determine whether you want the user to be able to    e only open a tree to read it   e edit a tree or    e analyse the processes that have been created on the basis of the tree     176         knowledgeTools    Finish by clicking on the  Save  button below  the new user will be created with all the    data and authorizations that you have entered           NOTE  The different authorization levels and their implications are described further on    in the User   s Manual        15 2  Searching for Existing Users    Enter the user name  the e mail address   name or surname of the user that you want to  search for in the field labelled    Search For    under    Search For User      Alternatively  you  can click on the button labelled  Show All Users  to display a complete list of all the    existing users            NOTE  If you do not enter anything in the field labelled    Search For     then your search  results will display all the existing users  This may prolong the search process if there is a    large number of users        In the default version  the user name is searched for in the user database  By using the  correspondingly labelled selection buttons  it is also possible to narrow the search to  names and surnames  Click on the  Search  button to start the
55.  fields will be displayed   In order to change the label  the type or the conditions of an existing field  simply use  the corresponding input fields or Shortlists    In order to delete an input field  click on the recycle bin icon on the left next to the label  of the input field    In order to change the order of the existing input fields  use the arrows     Click on  Save Changes  to save your changes     7 3  Document Generation    The generation of documents occurs in normal mode  not in structure editor mode  on  the basis of assigning a colour marking  i e  a process  In order to create a document   proceed as follows    1  Open a knowledge tree that has been prepared for document creation in normal  mode    2  Assign the colour marking  i e  mark the node as    True    or    False    depending on  your working situation  A sidebar will open on the right hand side of the screen  in  which the text modules that are associated with the node  where the colour  marking has been assigned  will be displayed  This also serves as a preview of the  structure of the document that is to be created     3  Open the    Process    menu and click on    Create Document        76      knowledgeTools    4  Depending on the security settings that you have configured  a pop up window  will now appear with the question     An ActiveX control element on this page is  possibly in conflict with other elements on this page  Do you want to allow this      Click on  Yes  in the window    5  Micro
56.  graphics or links  This additional information is classified in different categories and  displayed at the bottom of the screen   The displayed additional information always belongs to the currently active node   This is  marked by an orange coloured frame   If you select another node  then the additional  information of the selected node will be displayed   Depending on the application type of the knowledge tree  the following categories of  additional information may be displayed    e Explanations   e Details   e Text Module  True  or Text Module  False    e Practice    e Library    Each category has a correspondingly assigned tab at the bottom of the screen  The user  can switch between the individual categories of additional information by clicking on the  tabs with the mouse    Please note that these tabs are only displayed if the active node in question actually  possesses the corresponding additional information  Therefore it may be the case that a  certain node does not have any tabs on display at all  whereas another node may have    several tabs on display     2 9  Using the Logical Colour Marking System    Each node in a tree can be marked as either    True     green  or    False     red   The parent  nodes are then automatically marked as    True    or    False     depending on the logical  association between the nodes  which have been marked in this way and their parent    nodes   see figure      25      knowledgeTools                Fig   Nodes with logical co
57.  have been generated out of  processes  In addition  dossiers may contain master data fields such as contact details     These allow the dossiers to be assigned to customers or projects     11 7 1  Creating New Dossiers    Click on the    Dossiers    tab   Click on  Create New Dossier  and the    New Dossier    window will appear   Enter a name for the new dossier in the input field labelled    Dossier Name     Use a  unique name so that you can easily find the dossier again at a later stage    4  If your server is configured so that dossiers can contain master data  e g  names   addresses  etc   then the corresponding additional input fields will also be  displayed  Complete these input fields as well     5  Finish by clicking on the  Create  button to create the new dossier           NOTE  New dossiers are immediately visible and accessible to all of the users on your  server  i e  all of the users can see and change the name and master data of a dossier   However  the contents of the dossiers  processes  files  etc   are not visible to other    users        11 7 2  Searching Existing Dossiers    You can search dossiers for the name of the dossier  the creation date and the name of  the user that created the dossier  If your server is configured in a way that the dossiers  contain master data fields  then you can also search in the contents of the master data  fields  e g  for a specific telephone number   1  Click on the    Dossiers    tab   2  Click on    Search Dossiers 
58.  import the tree section from    Make a note of the number that is displayed at the bottom right hand corner of  the node  node ID     Open the knowledgeTool that you want to import to in structure editor mode    Click on the node that you want to attach the imported node s  to     Open the    Edit    menu in the menu bar     Click on    Import Tree Section     Alternatively you can also click on the    icon in  the toolbar    Select the kKnowledgeTool that you want to import from in the    Tree Name    list in  the window that opens   One click of the mouse on the first tree name that is  displayed in the list opens the entire list     Enter the node ID of the node that you want to import in the field labelled     Node ID     Please note that if the node that you have selected has child nodes of  its own  then these will also be imported    Click on the  Import  button     Deleting Nodes    It is only possible to delete nodes from the database that have previously been detached    or extracted     1     2  3  4   5    Click on the node that you want to detach or extract   Open the    Edit    menu in the menu bar    Click on    Uncouple Node    or    Extract Node       Open the    Navigation    menu     Click on    Recycle Bin    and the    Recycle Bin    window will open  Alternatively  you    can click on the T icon in the toolbar    Click on the  Search  button in the    Recycle Bin    window  You will now see a list  of all the nodes that exist in the database and that ar
59.  inal    or    term inology      e if the search term is entered followed directly by a question mark  term   then all words that consist of    term    and precisely one more character will be    searched for  e g     terms        You also have the option to narrow the search criteria  There are a number of options  available for doing this    e With the help of the    Node Colour    selection list  you can narrow the search to  include only nodes that have been assigned the selected colour marking    e If node weighting is used in the tree that you have opened  then you can use the  coloured check boxes in the row labelled    Weighting    to narrow the search to  include only the weighting that you have selected  Please note that this option is  only displayed in trees where the weighting option is used    e By using the    Search in    selection list  it is also possible to narrow the search to  include only the specified contents of the tree  The following search criteria are    available     24       knowledgeTools      Search in all contents  basic setting      Search only in node titles     Search only in alternative texts of the nodes     Search only in explanatory texts of the nodes    If a tree also possesses further categories of additional information  e g  details    or text modules   then these will also be displayed in the selection list     2 8  Additional Information    Nodes may also have different types of additional information in the form of texts  files  
60.  is installed on your LOGOS server  then you have the option to  create video based tutorials  By using these tutorials  you can link the videos that you  create to a knowledgeTool  You can then access and set the markings of nodes as    True     or    False    with the help of the time controlled script of the tutorial  In addition  you have  the option to display individual PowerPoint slides  which have previously been converted  to    SWF    format  in the video     These tutorials can be used  e g  as a teaching tool or to publish virtual    tours    through a    tree    amp  knowledge Tools   Mozilla Firefox m   o  X  Datei Bearbeiten Ansicht Chronik Lesezeichen Extras Hilfe i gt     Start Dossiers Knowledge Tutorials Datarooms Reporting Templates Options A amp D Users    Process Edit Scripts View Navigation Help  YX    ese AWWA      70O  1 Frstassuneton O  demo   version 40    an Second assumption    Third assumption      gt    11   Play 00 21 7 02 39 H              Fig   A tutorial    14 1  Creating New Tutorials    Click on the    Tutorials    tab at the top of the screen  A list of all the tutorials on the  server that are available to you will be displayed  Please note that only tutorials that  refer to knowledgeTools that you possess at least read access for will be displayed in the    list       Server 2 39   User   s Manual    knowledgeTools International GmbH 2008 1 69       E knowledgeTools          NOTE  In order to edit existing tutorials  or to create new tu
61.  knowledge tree initially occurs from left to right  i e  in the first  step the user initially identifies the objective that is to be achieved and then sees the  preconditions on the right that must be fulfilled in order to achieve the objective  In the  second step the user examines whether the individual preconditions are actually given  from right to left    The knowledgeTools   method uses three different logical associations to describe the  relationship between the parent and child elements  the AND association  the OR  association and the EXCLUSIVE association  In addition  each of these associations also  has the respective logical inversion  these are  NOT AND  NOT OR and NOT EXCLUSIVE   This is also supported by the automatic logical colour marking system  The users can  classify the statements in a node as either    True    or    False     The nodes are marked  green  for    True     or red  for    False      Depending on how the marked nodes are  associated with their respective parent nodes  AND  OR  EXCLUSIVE   the parent nodes  are in turn automatically marked as    True    or    False    and the logical colour marking is    assigned accordingly     11    2 1 1  The AND Association    In the case of the AND association the             statements of all the child elements  must be true  green  in order for the  statement of the parent element to be    true     The OR Association    2 1 2                     knowledgeTools    If the statement of a single child  
62.  later  e Installed Flash Player version 8 or later  the standard Flash Player software  can be downloaded free of charge from the following address      http   www  adobe com shockwave download download cgi P1_Prod_Version Sh  ockwaveFlash amp promoid BIOW      e Activated JavaScript  The use of JavaScript must be enabled in your browser     e Accessing the LOGOS server  Your workstation must be able to access the  computer that the LOGOS server is installed on via http  Note  The LOGOS server  computer may also be the workstation   e Customized security settings  The address   URL of your LOGOS server should  be entered as a Trusted site in Internet Explorer  Please refer below for further  details     e Installed Microsoft Office version 2000 or later    69            knowledgeTools    In order to ensure that information can be exchanged between the knowledge tree that is  displayed in Internet Explorer and Microsoft Word  it is necessary to configure the  address of the computer that the LOGOS server is installed on  as a    Trusted site    in  Internet Explorer for each Workstation  In order to do so  proceed as follows    1  Open Internet Explorer   Open the    Tools    menu and click on    Internet Options      Click on the    Security    tab   Click on the    Trusted sites    icon   Click on the    Sites    button     Se a    Enter the address of the computer that the LOGOS server is installed on in the  line labelled    Add this Web site to the zone    and add the ex
63.  mail address of their    own are sent     The basic requirement for sending forum contributions is that a mail server is configured    in the server settings of your LOGOS server           NOTE  This option must be executed using the LOGOS server console  i e  on the    computer that the LOGOS server is installed on        Open the knowledgeTools server console   Open the    Options    menu and select the    Server Options    option     Enter the address of your mail server in the line labelled    Mail Server        i    You now have the option to enter an e mail address  in the line labelled     Forum Recipient e Mail     to which the forum contributions of all the  knowledgeTools on your server will be sent  If you do not wish to have such a  central recipient address  then please leave the field empty    5  Restart the server by selecting the    Start Server   Stop Server    option in the       File    menu     In order to determine a separate recipient address for individual knowledgeTools  please  proceed as follows   1  Open the corresponding knowledgeTool   please note that you must also possess  the right to edit the knowledgeTool   Open the    Navigation    menu and select the    Technical Tree Properties    option   Make sure that the check box in front of the entry     Discussion Forum    Send Forum Contributions To    is activated   4  Enter the recipient e mail address in the input field below it     Finish by clicking on the  Save  button     30         knowled
64.  node  Click on the icon in order to  open the node  Alternatively  you can also do this by selecting the    Show Note Window       option from the    View    menu           NOTE  Please note that you can only create one note per node        34         knowledgeTools    3  Creating New Knowledge Trees    The Structure Editor provides you with an efficient tool for creating and editing your own    knowledgeTools tree  If you possess the corresponding authorizations  then you can    Switch directly between read and edit mode in the application without having to start a    new program           NOTE     In order to create a new tree in the system  you must be listed as a       Tree Administrator    in the user database              gt  eS    3 1     Open your web browser  we recommend that you use Internet Explorer     Enter the address of your LOGOS server and press the    Enter    key  the address  is     Attp   your_server_name knowledgetools dms      Login with your login information    Click on the    Knowledge    tab at the top of your screen    Click on the  New Tree  button at the bottom of your screen    Enter the Technical Tree Name and the Tree Display Name and click on the   Create  button   Please note that the technical tree name may not contain any  umlauts  accents or other special characters or spaces     The tree that you have just created will now appear in the list of your trees     Click on the  Edit  button in front of the name of the tree in order to edit 
65.  on it with the mouse   Open the    Settings    menu and select the option     Export Dataroom as Product  File       4  The task window will now open  In this window  the export of the dataroom will be  displayed as a new task that is to be executed  Please click on the P icon to start  the export process  If you want to delete the export task  then please click on  the M icon    5  After the successful export  the message     Completed Successfully     will be  displayed in the task window  Click on the icon to download the exported  dataroom    6  Please then click on the M   icon to remove the successfully completed task from    the task window     The user has the option to export only the actual data structure of a dataroom as a  product file  without the actual files  In this case  only the information on the directory  structure of the dataroom and the names of the files that are contained in it are included  in the product file  This may  for example  be useful if the dataroom that you want to  export contains data quantities that are so large that they would result in the product file  now being able to fit on a conventional data carrier    In order to export a dataroom to a product file without files  start by following steps  1 to 3 described above and then click on the    Configure Task    link under the impending  export task in the task window that appears  Next  click on the    Export Files    box  This is  enabled in the default version and must be disabled  
66.  red   then the    statement of the parent element is also             element is false    false                  In the case of the OR association it is sufficient for the statement of a single child    element to be true in order for the statement of the parent element to be true     However it is also possible for several or all of the child elements to be true     12       E knowledgeTools    2 1 3  The EXCLUSIVE Association       1 assumption    In the case of the EXCLUSIVE association only one single child element may be true     however it is never possible for several child elements to be true at the same time  The    statements of the child elements rule each other out     The knowledgeTools trees can be accessed and used via an interactive  web based user    interface     2 2  The Modules of the LOGOS Server    LOGOS provides an extensive set of standard functions for creating  editing and  publishing kKnowledgeTools knowledge trees  The system allows users to both view and  create knowledge trees and associated contents  e g  explanatory texts within the same  environment     In addition  it is also possible to activate additional function modules  The activation of    the additional modules occurs subject to the corresponding licences     Risk Analysis Calculator Module Dataroom Module    Legal Database Document Generator    Dossier Module Script Editor Tutorial Module    Kolco       The add on modules of LOGOS are described briefly in the following chapters     2
67.  s purpose  for example  names such as  Write Internal    Memo    Create Offer   etc       133          A       knowledgeTools    Using the    Knowledge Field    selection list  select the knowledge tree where you  want to create the process based on your template  In order to do so  click on the  name of the required knowledge tree in the list    If you want the creation of the process to start from a specific node of the tree   then click on the  Change  button  A list with a hierarchical display of the entire  tree will then be displayed  Select the node where you want the creation of the  process to begin from the list  by clicking on the title of the corresponding node  with the left mouse button  The path of the node will now be displayed in the  input field  Click anywhere on the screen outside the list to close the list and use  the entered path    If you want processes that are based on your template to be used to generate  documents and a specific layout template to be used when doing so  then click on  the check box labelled    Create Documents Using Type of Process     Click on the   Browse  button  select the required layout template from the window that opens  and click on  Open     Finish by clicking on the  Save  button to save the template  The template will  immediately be visible to all users  Users that do not possess read access to the  tree that is referred to in the process template will have the template displayed as    a grey disabled option and will 
68.  search  The search  results will display all the users that match the search criteria that you have entered  You    can access more information on the user by clicking on the user   s name     15 3  Deleting Existing Users          NOTE  Please note that if you delete a user  then all the processes that have been  created by this user will also be deleted  The only exceptions are those processes that    have been created on servers on which the Dossier Module is installed and      have been activated for other users        1  Enter the user name  the e mail address   name or surname of the user that you  want to search for in the field labelled    Search For    under    Search For User      Click on the  Search  button    3  Select the user that you want to delete by clicking on the user name    4  Click on the  Delete User  button     15 4  Creating New User Groups    Creating new user groups is generally the same as creating new users   1  Click on the button labelled  New User Group  at the bottom of the screen     2  Enter a name for the user group that you want to create     177             15 5     15 6       knowledgeTools    Select whether you want to grant the future members of the user group      Supervisor        Manager     or    Viewer    rights under    Global Access Rights       Select the administrative rights that you want to grant to the future members of  the user group under    Administrative Access Rights       Select the trees that you want the future m
69.  section of the screen to delete the    selected regulation     Click on the Lf icon at the top in the right hand section of the screen to edit the  selected regulation  A window will open and all the versions of the regulation   i e  the versions of the regulation that were valid during different periods  will be    displayed   Click on the M or Lf icons in order to delete or edit the corresponding version     If you click on the L icon then the editing window will open     92      knowledgeTools    6  Please make your changes and then finish by clicking on  Save            NOTE  Decrees are entered in the database in the same way as laws        Moving Regulations  Individual regulations may be moved within the same structure level or across several  structure levels    In order to move a regulation within the same structure level  select the corresponding  T    regulations and move it up or down by using the   or icons     In order to move a regulation to another structure level  select the regulation and then    click on the   icon  Navigate to the structure level where you want to move the    regulation in the left hand section of the screen  Select the structure level by clicking on    it with the mouse and then click on the 5 icon  If there are already regulations on the  structure level  then the new regulation will be inserted under the existing regulations  If    you would like to insert the new regulation above a certain regulation  then select the    regulation in 
70.  select    Folder Options    in the     Tools    menu in Windows Explorer and click on the    View    tab  Scroll down to    Hidden  files and folders    under    Advanced settings    and activate the option     Show hidden files  and folders       Finish by clicking on the button labelled  Apply for All Folders   The template directory    will now be visible        11 3  Creating Layout Templates    Layout templates are a requirement for the generation of individual documents  They  determine the information that is included in the document and the appearance of the  document  layout   The following different types of information can be included in the  document  e g    e text modules from the tree  in which the process  that will be used as a basis  for document generation was generated in   e data from the input fields of the tree  in which the process  that will be used as  a basis for document generation was generated in   e data from the master data fields of the dossier  in which the process was    generated     The creation of layout templates is optional and only necessary if you want to manage  the layout of the documents that you want to generate  If you do not create a layout  template  then documents will be created with a standard template    In order to create a layout template  proceed as follows    1  Open Microsoft Word    2  Create a new document  select the    New    option from the    File    menu     3  Format the document to your requirements  e g  by i
71.  the patches from a data storage device     205      knowledgeTools          NOTE  The download of patches from the Internet is only possible if the computer that    the LOGOS server is installed on has Internet access and can establish a connection to    our patch server at  https   secure knowledgetools de       In order to download and install patches from the Internet  proceed as follows     1   2     Click on the    Patches    tab at the top of the screen if this tab is not already active   You will see the patches that can be installed or are already installed in a window  labelled    List of installed and installable patches     Click on the  Show new  patches  button to connect to the patch server and check whether there are new  patches available  If there are new patches available  then the numbers and  names of these patches will be displayed    Click on the  Install new patches  button    Click  OK  button in the window that opens and the download and installation of  the patches will be executed    You will receive a corresponding message after the successful installation of the  patches  You must now restart the server    Please click on the    Server    tab at the top of the screen and then on the  Stop  Server  button  You will receive a message when the server has been stopped   Click on the  Start Server  button and the server will restart  You will receive the  following message after the successful start of the server     Status  Server is    running      
72.  the system  Otherwise stopping or restarting the server may result in  the loss of data    1  Start the LOGOS server console if it is not already open  Open the Windows Start  menu and go to the    LOGOS    program group  Select    LOGOS Server Console    in  the    LOGOS    program group    2  The status bar of the server console will display whether the server is running or  not    3  Open the    File    menu in the LOGOS server console and select the    Start   Stop  Server    option  If the server was already running  then the server will now be    stopped  If the server was not running  then the server will now start     18 1 2  Editing the LOGOS Server Configuration    The server console allows you to edit a number of configuration settings on the LOGOS    server  In order to do so  start by opening the configuration window     196      knowledgeTools    1  Start the LOGOS server console if it is not already open  Open the Windows Start  menu and go to the    LOGOS    program group  Select    LOGOS Server Console    in  the    LOGOS    program group     2  Open the    Options    menu and select the option labelled    Server Options        You have the option to set or edit the following settings in the configuration window   Web Server Port  This allows you to determine the port that you want the LOGOS    server to use  In the default setting Port 80 is used     Web Server Prefix  The prefix determines how the URL  at which the LOGOS server can  be accessed  is formed 
73.  the text module     78      knowledgeTools    You also have the option to undo changes to the text modules  In order to do so  select    the text module in question by clicking on it with the mouse and then click on the   icon  in the sidebar    The    Versions    window will now open on the left hand side of the screen  All the edited  versions of the text module will be displayed in the window  Select an edited version by  clicking on the button labelled  Use This Version   This version will now again be    displayed in the sidebar on the right hand side of the screen     Inserting New Text Modules  In addition to the text modules that have been integrated in the document as a result of  the colour marking being assigned  you can also insert your own text modules     1  In order to do so  select the text module in the sidebar under which the new text    module should be inserted and click on the A icon     2  A new empty line will appear with the     icon at the beginning of the line  Select    the line by clicking on it with the mouse and then click on the Fil icon to enter the  actual text   3  The text editor will now open on the left  Enter a text and click on  Save  to save  your entries   Please note that text modules that are added in this way are not linked to a node of the    knowledge tree     Deleting Text Modules    Select the text module that you want to delete by clicking on it with the mouse and then    click on the T icon  Please note that the text module i
74.  this  you are exporting the data of the process  but not    the process itself        2 13 7  Deleting a Process    Open the    Process    menu and select the    Manage Processes    option    2  Select the process that you want to delete from the list that appears by clicking  on it with the mouse  The name of the selected process is now displayed in the  input field labelled    Process       Click on the  Delete  button   4  Confirm deletion by clicking on the  OK  button in the next window     Close the    Manage Processes    window by clicking on the  X  button     2 13 8  Creating a Directory    In order to ensure clarity  it is possible to create different  sub directories and to move  the saved processes into these or to save processes in a certain directory when it is    saved for the first time     Open the    Process    menu and select the    Manage Processes    option   Click on the  Create Directory  button   If you want to create a subdirectory  then first click on the parent folder on the  left hand side of the window and when you have selected the folder that you want  to create it in  click on the  Create Directory  button    4  Enter the name of the new directory in the new window that opens and confirm    this action by clicking on the  Create  button     2 13 9  Deleting a Directory  Open the    Process    menu and select the    Manage Processes    option   2  Select the  sub directory that you want to delete by clicking on the corresponding  folder on the 
75.  to create the calculation field at and then click    on the    icon to create a new calculation field  In this way  you can create as many    calculation fields as you want at the node      Calculation fields have a unique name that cannot be changed  The illustration below    contains three calculation fields  they are named A2  B2 and C2  By using these unique    names  the field can be referenced in other calculation fields  The name always consists    of an upper case letter and a number  Thereby  the number corresponds to the ID of the    node where the field was created  Therefore  all the calculation fields of a node have the    Same number in their name  The upper case letter is used to differentiate between the    individual calculation fields of a node     Configure calculatian       Name Description Formula    im Al First field description    m Bi B  Second field description    r    Fig   The sidebar with calculation fields in structure editor mode    Each calculation field has two input fields     The    Description    field is identified by the       icon and allows knowledgeTools  users to enter a brief description of the field content  This could be a description    such as  e g     Cost in EUR        The    Formula    field is identified by the Ff icon and can be used either to enter  numerical values or to enter formulas  If the field is left empty  then users can  enter numerical values in the field in the published version of the knowledgeTool   which can 
76.  to minimize the window again and hide the display of the values and    expected values  then click on the    icon     If you move the mouse pointer over the   icon at the node in question  all the  probabilities  values and expected values that have been entered and calculated at the    node are displayed     lusion rnd assumption             assumption          Fig   The display of all the values of a node    The first two lines display the probability of occurrence of the node event  This value may  lie between 0  and 100     The value that has been entered by the user for the node event is displayed under the  node value  The minimum and maximum expected values are calculated from the  probability of occurrence and the entered value  The last line displays the number of  expected values that may result on the basis of the entered and calculated values at the    node     The    Probability distribution    window can be accessed by clicking on the lu icon in the  input window for entering values and probabilities     159    E knowledgeTools    Probability distribution  Conclusion  x1     Probability in    1 240  000 00      O 00 208 333 00 416 666 00 674 999 00 833 332 00 1 041 665 00 1 249 998  00  Wert in        Download chart Download Excelsheet    Probability Amount  24 62 29 37  0 005   T 54 9 27  0 005   T 36 13 34  250 000 005   3334 45 36  1 000 000 005   5 64 15 665  1 250 000 005       Fig   A display of the distribution of probability    The    Probability distri
77.  to which    you do not have any access  Therefore  please ensure that a script is no longer required    by any other users before deleting it     In order to do so  click on the    Options    and then on    Manage Scripts     There should be a    link labelled    Linked Knowledge Trees    next to the name of each script  If you click on    the link next to the name of the script that you want to delete  a list of the    knowledgeTools that are linked to the script that you want to delete will be displayed        1  Click on the    Options    tab     2  Please then click on    Manage Scripts        10 7       An alphabetically sorted list of all the scripts that exist on your server will now be    displayed  You now have the option to delete one or more scripts  In order to do    so  click on the selection boxes in front of the names of the corresponding scripts       Please then click on the  Delete  button at the bottom and the task window will    open  In this window  the delete process will be displayed as a new task that is to    be executed       Please click on the P icon to start the delete process  If you want to cancel the    delete process  then please click on the T icon       After the successful deletion  the message     Completed Successfully     will be    displayed in the task window       Please then click on the T icon to remove the successfully completed task from    the task window     Managing Access to Scripts    Scripts are created within a single tree
78.  tree  If there are processes or templates that relate to the  tree that you want to delete  then these will also be displayed in the window   Click on the  Delete  button to confirm the deletion of the knowledge tree    Next  a task window will appear where the deletion of the knowledge tree will be  displayed as a new task that is to be executed  Please click on the P icon to start  the deletion process  If you want to cancel the deletion  then click on the mM icon   After the successful deletion of the knowledge tree  the message     Completed  Successfully     will be displayed in the task window  Click on the M icon to remove    the successfully completed task from the task window     Command Reference    An overview of the icons that are used in the toolbar of the structure editor  and the    functions that are attributed to them  are listed below     op    Create New Node  creates a new  empty node as a child node of the selected    node   Insert New Node Before  inserts a node before the selected node   Insert New Node Behind  inserts a node behind the selected node     Cut Node  cuts the activated node out of the tree structure and copies it to the    clipboard     Extract Node  removes a node that is positioned between a parent node and at  least one child node from the tree structure and moves it to the recycle bin  any    possible subsequent child nodes remain in place     Uncouple Node  removes a node from the tree structure and moves it to the    recycle bin  an
79.  two cases   1  If a user marks a parent node as    True    or    False     then its child nodes are  locked   2  If a node with an Exclusive association is marked as    True     then all the other  nodes within this Exclusive association are locked  as such an association may    contain one true node      2 11  Special Cases    The authors of knowledge trees have the option to determine how the logical colour  markings within a tree are assigned by the user  by configuring specific settings in the  technical properties of a tree    1  If the    Two Valued Logic    option is activated in the technical tree properties  then  the node may only be marked as    True    or unmarked to    Not Checked     The     False    option is not available  This is particularly useful in the case of trees that  illustrate processes    2  If the    Force Colour Marking    option is activated in the technical tree properties   then the users may only assign the logical colour marking to child nodes  In this    case  only the system can assign the colour marking of the parent node     2 12  Discussion Forums    The users of the system can have a discussion amongst each other on each individual  node in a knowledge tree  In this case  each and every node of a tree can have its own  discussion forum    Contributions to the discussion may be sent directly from the active node in the tree  display to the forum  The entries always refer to the respective activated node in the  currently open tree    I
80.  used to enter laws     8 4 1     Entering New Laws    Click on the    A amp D    tab at the top of the screen    Click on the  New act  button at the bottom of the screen and an input mask will  open where you will be able to enter the master data of the law      Abbreviation     Title     Short Title     Language     Volume  in which the law was published      Journal  in which the law was published      Page  on which the law was published      Year     Regulation Mark  this setting decides whether the individual regulations in the    law begin with    or No      The mandatory fields are marked by an asterisk      Please try and complete the    input fields as fully as possible           NOTE  The selection that you make for the abbreviation is the same one that will be  used later for citing the laws in the knowledgeTools texts so that the corresponding    law is correctly linked in the library        ce    Finish by clicking on the  Save  button to access the editor and enter the contents    of the law     Start by creating a hierarchical structure for the law  The editor is divided into two    sections  the hierarchical structure of the law is displayed on the left hand side of the    90          E knowledgeTools    screen and the associated individual regulations are displayed on the right hand side of    the screen  The operation of the editor occurs using the icons at the top of the screen     Creating and Editing the Hierarchical Structure  1  The first structure le
81.  window  This applies under the condition that the law or decision in question is  included in the Legal Database  This database contains the full texts of the linked laws    and decisions     Acts     s  5 433 BGB       5 242 50GB       Fig   The    Library    window displaying links to laws    The display of laws and decisions depends on the configuration of the client and the    contents of the respective displayed knowledgeTools     8 1  Viewing Laws    The user has the option to search the Legal Database for a specific law and access it in    full text or to access a specific regulation from a knowledgeTool     8 1 1  Viewing Laws in the Database    Click on the    A amp D    tab at the top of the screen and then on the button labelled  Show all  acts   An alphabetical list of all the laws that exist on the server will now be displayed   Click on the abbreviation of the law to access the law  The content of the law will now be  displayed as an expandable  hierarchical document structure on the left hand side of the    screen  Those elements that have sub elements have a    plus    sign in front of them     84       E3 knowledgeTools       knowledgeTools   Mozilla Firefox    Datei Bearbeiten Ansicht Chronik Lesezeichen Extras Hilfe       Dossiers Knowledge Tutorials Datarooms Reporting Templates Options    BGB B  rgerliches Gesetzbuch  BGB B  rgerliches Gesetzbuch   deutsch   published in bgbl III 195 1949  WH Buch I Allgemeiner Tell  a  Untertitel 1 Begr  ndung  El Buch 
82. 2 Recht der Schuldverhaltnisse    Abschnitt 1 Inhalt der  Schuldverhaltnisse    O Abschnitt 2 Gestaltung  rechtsgeschaftlicher  Schuldverhaltnisse durch  Allgemeine Geschaftsbedingungen   E Abschnitt 3 Schuldverhaltnisse aus  Yertragen     Titel 1 Begr  ndung  Inhalt und   Beendigung    direct selection            311 Rechtsgeschaftliche und rechtsgeschaftsahnliche Schuldverhaltnisse  seit  01 01 2002     1  Zur Begr  ndung eines Schuldverhdaltnisses durch Rechtsgesch  ft sowie zur   nderung des  Inhalts eines Schuldverhdltnisses ist ein Vertrag zwischen den Beteiligten erforderlich  soweit  nicht das Gesetz ein anderes vorschreibt     2  Ein Schuldverhdltnis mit Pflichten nach    241 Abs  2 entsteht durch   1  die Aufnahme von Vertragsverhandlungen    2  die Anbahnung eines Vertrags  bei welcher der eine Teil im Hinblick auf eine etwaige  rechtsgeschaftliche Beziehung den anderen Teil die M  glichkeit zur Einwirkung auf seine Rechte   Rechtsg  ter und Interessen gew  hrt oder ihm diese anvertraut  oder   3    hnliche gesch  ftliche Kontakte     3  Ein Schuldverhdltnis mit Pflichten nach    241 Abs  2 kann auch zu Personen entstehen  die  nicht selbst Vertragspartel werden sollen  Ein solches Schuldverhdltnis entsteht insbesondere   wenn der Dritte in besonderem Mae Vertrauen f  r sich in Anspruch nimmt und dadurch die  Vertragsverhandlungen oder den Vertragsschluss erheblich beeinflusst      other versions      311a Leistungshindernis bei   Vertragsschluss  seit  01 01 2002 
83. 4  Using the Sidebar    The input fields that exist for a node  see chapter 7 2 below  are displayed in a sidebar  on the right hand side of the screen when in normal mode  This occurs as soon as the  fields have been activated by assigning the corresponding colour markings    The sidebar opens automatically as soon as the node in question is marked as    True    or     False     Of course  it is also possible to open the sidebar yourself by clicking on the tab  on the left hand side of the sidebar    The users can now enter their data in the corresponding fields and confirm the entries by    clicking on the  Save  button     72    E knowledgeTools    The sidebar also displays the fields that require an entry due to the automatic logical  colour marking system  By clicking on    Show Node    with the mouse  the corresponding    node  with the respective input field  is centred on the screen     S knowledgeTools   Mozilla Firefox Jes    Datei Bearbeiten Ansicht Chronik Lesezeichen Extras Hilfe   Start Dossiers Knowledge Tutorials Datarooms Reporting Templates Options A amp D Users  Process Edit Scripts View Navigation Help  BAAYX B   SFOORSs   i  TOO    1 First assumption    demo   demo   heitkam atsolute com    Version 25    Input field 1     Input field 2     a on ome  je ss    Third assumption          E Ubertrage Daten von localhost       Fig   The sidebar displays all of the activated input fields of a path    7 2  Using Input Fields    Input fields can be used in the gen
84. Apply  F  Postcode  Apply  O City   Apply  O Country   Apply  F  P O  Box  Apply  O phone  on business   Apply  O phone  private   Apply  O Mobile phone  Apply  O Fax   Apply  LI Email    E http    localhost knowledgetools dms frame           Fig   The master data fields that are available after installation    The predefined master data fields that are applicable for the majority of applications are  displayed under    Available Standard Fields       In order to use one of these fields as a master data field for your dossiers  click on the  check box in front of the name of the corresponding field and then click on the  Save   button at the bottom of the screen  The selected field will now be moved to the top to the     Currently Used Master Data Fields    section and  once it is saved  it will be available in all    of the dossiers  Of course  you also have the option to select several fields at once     In order to create your own custom master data fields  click on the button labelled   Add Custom Field   Enter the name of the new master data field in the input field that  appears  If you want to create another field of your own  click on  Add Custom Field   again  As long as you have not yet saved a created field  you can always remove it again  by clicking on the  Undo  button     Finish by clicking on  Save  to save the new master data field s      You also have the option to combine custom and predefined master data fields  e g   select several predefined master data 
85. Directory cneecetcnteencieatenscnsnernceennsvencoenssetcecuevesdnanesssensuceecaas 33  243 9  Deleting a Directory scrccivets cchascidnuriauid aaa aaa 33  2 13 10  MOVING a PROCES nE ra EE EEE AT 34  2 13 11  INQUGSS RIE E E E EE E O 34  3   Creating New Knowledge Tree         ssssssnnnsnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnn 35  3d Configuring the Technical Tree PropertieS            ssssssssssrsrrnnsrrnrrnrnrrnrrrrnrrrens 35  3 1  1  O E E E E E sent e cece neste  36  3 1 2  Summary Description   DESCriPtion           ccccec cece cece eee eeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeenees 36  3 1 3  PD OU CAO  TYDE erp canis ca snaensaasanpnapanelsaaaaumesaennigetsaspiaediab iat a a 36  3 1 4  OPONA FUR UON era EE E E AE AEE A 37  3 2 Making knowledgeTools Accessible to Other Users   Publishing                0008 39  4  Importing and Exporting Data         ccccccccccccseeeneeeeeeeeeeeeeeeesseeeeeeeeannnnueeeaees 41  4 1  Data Exchange  Importing a knowledgeTool from a Fil                 ccccceee cece eens 41  4 2  Data Exchange  Importing knowledgeTools from LexOgramM          ssseeeeeeeeeees 42  4 3  Activating an Imported or Newly Created KnowledgeToOol            ccceeeee eee eens 43  4 4  Data Exchange  Importing Scripts from a File           cccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeueauenegs 43  4 5  Activating an Imported or Newly Created SCript            c ccc ccceeeeeeeeeee eee eenees 44  4 6  Data Exchange  Exporting a Script to a Fil         ccc cece ee eeeeseeeeeeeeeeeeeees 45  4 7  Data Exchange  Exp
86. Handling Technical Problems         ssssssssnnunnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnn 209  19 1  Resolving ProblemS       sssasesssasannassansusennunconnnassnnanennuusennuaaonunaennnanonnanaannuaan 209  19 2  Reporting PFODICINS crisisosrsrinin aaa 209  20  Final Not   s ssissssisrossnnana EAA ENEE EEEa EEEa 211    Release Notes LOGOS 2 39    The current release 2 39 includes an interface to the German Federal Ministry of Justice   s     eNorm    software  eNorm is the main component of the Federal Ministry of Justice   s     Electronic Working Aids and Promulgation    project that aims to support compliance with  legal form and editing requirements in the drafting of laws and regulations  With the  corresponding licence  scripts that have been created in LOGOS will now be able to be  exported in an eNorm compatible XML format and then imported to eNorm for further    use within the framework of drafting legislation     Furthermore  various functions  such as the Script Editor and the export datarooms and    scripts have been updated and improved     Berlin  March 2008      knowledgeTools    1  System Requirements    LOGOS is a web based multi user system that allows users to access and exchange data  by connecting to a central server using a standard web browser  This data consists  primarily of knowledgeTools knowledge trees and the data that is associated with them    In order to utilize the system  your workstation must meet the following system    requirements 
87. Hilfe       Start Dossiers Knowledge    Tutorials Datarooms Reporting Templates Options A amp D Users  de en     Edit tutorial  Step 2  Create script  Time in seconds Title Action  5 Show node    Focus node true    Focus node true           x   20   x   25 Show node   x   30   x  fao    Show node    FA Fertig          Fig   Creating the tutorial script for a new tutorial    172      knowledgeTools    In order to create a script  proceed as follows     i    Click on the  Play Video  button and the selected video file will be opened  You  can always stop the video or jump to a certain position in the video using the slide  control    Click on the  New Marker  button  If you now click on the clock icon on the  right hand side next to the disabled field  then the current time of the video will  be used  The event that you then define will be executed at this time    You also have the option to enter a text in the field labelled  Title   This text will  be displayed in the video window of the tutorial  under the video  and function as  a marker to a specific position in the tutorial  Tip  it is possible to select a value of  O seconds for the first time and to assign it a title such as  Start   By clicking on  this title the subsequent viewers of the tutorial will always be able to return to the  beginning of the tutorial    You can determine which event will be activated at the predetermined time by  using the drop down list in the    Action    column  The following events are  a
88. ID of the respective node  Each ID  can only exist once in the tree    However  a node with a specific ID may have several associations in a tree  i e  although  the node    physically    only exists once  it has been used by the author in multiple  positions in the tree  e g  due to reasons of efficiency   Therefore the node ID alone does  not suffice in order to clearly identify a node  In order to do this  the path of the node is  also required  A node may appear in a tree several times with the same ID  however  each node may only occupy one specific position in the tree  The node path is a    description of the path to a node starting from the start node of the tree     The path of a node is thus established as described below   e The first node of a tree does not have a path as it is the starting point of the tree   e The nodes on the first level of the tree are numbered from top to bottom and  consequently have the paths   1   2   3  etc   e Child nodes that are attached to the first node of the first level are also numbered  from top to bottom  however they also receive the path of the parent node as a  prefix  These child nodes consequently have the paths   1 1   1 2   1 3 etc  This    numbering method is used throughout the entire tree   see the figure below          Fig   An example of node paths    20      knowledgeTools    Therefore  by using the combination of the ID and path of the node  one can clearly  identify it and localize it in the tree  It is also possi
89. If a node is linked to a text section  then this will be indicated by the presence of  the E  icon at the bottom right hand corner of the node  If you click on the icon  then the    linked text section will be displayed in the sidebar and highlighted in grey     118       E knowledgeTools    knowledge Tools   Mozilla Firefox mE    Datei Bearbeiten Ansicht Chronik Lesezeichen Extras Hilfe    Dossiers Knowledge Tutorials Datarooms Reporting Templates Options Users  delen     Process Edit Scripts View Navigation Help    Demoscript 4    BAOAYX B   sAWOasS   i   APO E Document  Conclusion D   gt       i  demo   Version 33 e      C Search for page number  Demoscript  E  Part I    onah 1    Lorem ipsum dolor sit amet  consetetur sadipscing elitr  sed  diam nonumy eirmod tempor invidunt ut labore et dolore  magna aliquyam erat  sed diam voluptua  At vero eos et    First assumption accusam et justo duo dolores et ea rebum   e  8    Stet clita kasd gubergren  no sea takimata sanctus est Lorem    Second assumption   ipsum dolor sit amet   i     i   t vero eos et accusam et justo duo dolores et ea rebum  Stet    clita kasd gubergren  no sea takimata sanctus est Lorem          eR ipsum dolor sit amet   onn O Part II       Part III          433 BGB     242 StGB   s     433 BGB     s     242 StGB    E   bertrage Daten von localhost             Fig   The sidebar with a linked text section    If the node is linked to text sections in different texts  then the linked text section in the  first
90. Open the    Backup    menu and select the    Configure Backup    option    Select the time when you want the backup to be created using the arrow buttons  next to the field labelled    Hour     It is recommended to select a time when there  are no or only very few users working on the system    Select the days when you want the backup to be created using the check boxes  next to the field labelled    Days     You may select more than one day    Click on the  Browse  button to select the directory where you want the backup to  be saved  Navigate to the required directory in the window that opens and select  the required directory  Confirm your selection by clicking on  OK     Finish by clicking on  Save  to save your entries     You must restart the LOGOS server for your changes to take effect     202         knowledgeTools    8  Open the    File    menu in the LOGOS server console and select the    Start   Stop    2     Server    option  The LOGOS server will now stop   Click on    Start   Stop Server     The LOGOS server will now start     18 1 8  Restoring Backups    You have the option to restore backups  which have been created as described above  on    the same LOGOS installation or on a LOGOS installation on another server           NOTE  Please note that you can only restore backups in the same LOGOS version     Therefore  it is not possible e g  to restore a backup that was created in version 2 38 on    a system that is running version 2 39     Please also note that w
91. Please then click on the  Save     button and continue with steps 4 to 6 described above     46       4 8       knowledgeTools    Data Exchange  Importing Datarooms    If the Dataroom Module is activated on your LOGOS server  then you have the option to    import datarooms that exist as    KIP    files into your system           NOTE  You must possess the    Tree Admin    administrative access right in order to be able    to perform this task              NOTE  When importing a knowledgeTool that is linked to a dataroom  it is essential that    first the dataroom and then the knowledgeTool are imported        4 9     Click on the    Options    tab    Please then click on    Import Product File       Click on the  Browse  button in the window that opens and select the directory  where the product file that you want to import is saved  Select the corresponding  file by clicking on it with the mouse and then please click on the  Open  button   Please then click on the  Upload  button    The task window will open after the successful upload of the file  In this window   the import of the product file will be displayed as a new task that is to be  executed  Please click on the  gt  icon to start the import process  If you want to  delete the import task  then please click on the T icon    After the successful import  the message     Completed Successfully     will be  displayed in the task window  Click on the   f icon to remove the successfully    completed task from the task win
92. Raw Data ANalySiS aratetars autnandancsnas kaa a 194  17o  Me er a eA E ee ee meee E 195  18  General Administration of the Server         ssssssss2222222222222202222u2022222202220  80 196  18 1  Ihe LOGOS Server COMS OMS errereen En EREA EEEN 196  18 1 1  Starting   Stopping the Server         sssssssssssssesssnsssnnssnnnesnsnennsnrensnrenenenn 196  18 1 2  Editing the LOGOS Server Configuration            ccccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeuueuuueaas 196  e AOC A a O ea E ENE Aa 198  18 1 4  Changing User PasswordS          sssssssssesssssssnesnsssnnessnnessnnesnnnssrenssenneseen 199  18 15  Installing PALCOS cccansasssanteetastecta aana ai 199  18 1 6 Creating Backups Manually        sssnssssnsssnsssnnssnsnssnssssnnnssnnnesnnnssnsnesnsnesenns 201  18 1 7  Creating Backups Automatically          sossssssnnnnnnnnsnnnnsnsnrnnnnrrrrnnerrnnrrrnenns 202  18  1 0  RESONO BACKUPS joven anccorecseacararwniasiaaas ni T E erii 203  15 2 The LOGOS Wed CONSOMC ws cssactns hese nesetesantestoseneietesantestersneieteeantstereneieteeeaes 204  18 2 1  Accessing the Web Console        sssssssssssssssssnessnnsssnnsssnnesnsnesnsneenenennesenne 204  18 2 2  Starting   Stopping the Serv CF  rirsirsriririrrerrirrecirrin eriniki 205  16 2 5  dS Alling PACOS sinensnarsnwnesdeacrwinGanasiauasescunadausnicauaarersesssauniaainsaannees 205      knowledgeTools    16 24 Accessing Log TICS onccinncaecioanaaraieaeasaeetesaeatesasssaieneinseencevanereeuanunteoees 207   EG 223  Creating  BACKUD S aviron e AE 207  19  
93. a  The search window displays the first 30 results  if there are more than    30 results  you can display these by clicking on the  Next  button     23      knowledgeTools    The level of the found node in the tree is graphically illustrated in front of the node title   This is displayed by the number of dots inside the square brackets  thus a node that is on  the third level of the tree is displayed as follows            Click on the title of a node to display the corresponding node in the tree    In addition  nodes that appear in several different positions in a tree are also displayed  with the suffix  more paths      If you click on  more paths      a new window will open  with information on how often the node appears in the tree and where the node in  question is positioned in the tree  displayed by using the node path   Click on the node    title in order to display the node in question within the tree     2 7 2  Advanced Search Options    The user has several search options when entering search terms    e if two search terms are entered after each other  i e  without an operand   term1 term2  then the texts that contain both term1 AND term2 will be searched for   e if only a single search term is entered     term     then this exact search term will be searched for   e if only part of the search term is entered followed by an asterisk as a wild card  term   then all words that consist of    term    and any other number of characters will be  searched for  e g     term
94. access rights  will be saved in the    backup     201            knowledgeTools    In order to create a full backup of your LOGOS server  proceed as follows     i    Create a directory where you want the backup to be saved on the computer that  the LOGOS server is running on    Start the LOGOS server console by opening the Windows Start menu and then  selecting    LOGOS Server Console    in the    LOGOS    program group    Open the    Backup    menu in the server console and select the    Make Full Backup     option    In the window that now opens  select the directory where you want the backup  data to be saved  see step 1 above  and confirm your selection by clicking on the     OK  button  The backup will start immediately           NOTE  Please note that although it is possible to continue working on the server while    the backup is being created  the backup process will have a considerable effect on the    performance of the system  Therefore  backups should only be created when there are no    or only very few users working on the server        18 1 7  Creating Backups Automatically    You also have the option to create backups automatically  When creating backups    automatically  you can determine     the day of the week and    the time    that you want to create the backup on and the directory in which you want the backup to    be saved     In order to set up automatic backups  please proceed as follows     Start the LOGOS server console if it is not already open    
95. all the possible properties of a node     1   Logical Colour Marking Result 8   Module Icon    2     Node Title 9   Script Icon   3   Weighting 10   Dataroom Icon   4   Colour Marking 11   Forum Contribution Icon  5   Alternative Text 12     Note Icon   6     Calculation Field Icon 13   Risk Analysis Icon    7     Input Field Icon    The properties of a node that can be edited include   e the node title  e the alternative text  e the node colour  coloured marking on the right hand side of the node   e node weighting  in order to identify the relevance of a node   e the logical association and  e the position of the node within a tree section   The node ID cannot be edited as it is the unique identification number of each node and    is automatically assigned by the system     The node title  the alternative text  the node colour and the type of logical association  can be edited in the    Properties    window  In order to open this window  click on the       Properties    option in the    Edit    menu or the shortcut menu of the selected node     Alternatively  you also have the option to click on the    P icon in the toolbar     Mode properties       Conclusion    Alternative text    Weight    ES      Logical conjunction     Exclusive  Save Cancel    Fig   The    Node Properties    window       50    5 2        ce   2    5 3       knowledgeTools    Editing Titles  Alternative Texts  Node Colours and Weighting    Select the node that you want to edit by clicking on it with th
96. alue for the node is calculated in accordance with the probability of  occurrence of the corresponding node    The values that are calculated in this way can be downloaded as MS Excel files    In addition  the graphical process analysis can also be used to calculate the average  probabilities of occurrence on the basis of all the existing processes of a knowledge tree  version     In order to use the Risk Analysis Module  you require the corresponding licence     2 2 7  the Calculator Module    The calculator function enables users to perform calculations within a knowledge tree on  the basis of predefined calculation formulas  In order to do so  numerical values and  formulas can be entered in the fields and linked to the knowledge tree  The entered  numerical values and the results of the calculations can be saved and exported to MS  Excel     In order to use the Calculator Module  you require the corresponding licence     15    E knowledgeTools    2 2 8  The Tutorial Module    By using the Tutorial Module  users have the option to create video based multimedia  tutorials within LOGOS  In these tutorials  users can link videos in Flash format to  knowledgeTools  By using a _ time controlled script  nodes can be accessed in  knowledgeTools and assigned colour markings  In addition  you have the option to  display individual PowerPoint slides in the tutorials  No additional software is required in  order to view the video  The tutorials can be accessed using a unique address 
97. and processes by using the  Search  function  Enter the  name of the dossier or process that you want to search for in the input field  specify  whether you want to search for a dossier or a process by clicking on one of the selection    buttons and then click on the  Search  button     The display of the    Users    tab does not depend on the global access rights  the display  of this tab only depends on whether the user possesses the necessary    User Admin       administrative access right     2 4  Navigation in the Tree    knowledgeTools trees consist of nodes  which are associated with one another and  arranged in levels according to the knowledgeTools logic  Nodes that have subordinate  nodes attached to them are referred to as parent nodes  Subordinate nodes that are  attached to a parent node are referred to as child nodes    If a node has a subordinate level  then this will be indicated by the presence of an arrow    on the right hand side of the node  see figure      First assumption i    iam mi  Third assumption    Fig   The arrow shows that there is a subordinate level       18      knowledgeTools    Click on the node in order to open the subordinate levels in the tree  The respective  selected node will be marked by an orange coloured frame    Click on the subsequent nodes in the levels that are displayed until you reach the  required depth of information    If you click on a node on the same level or a higher level  then any subordinate levels  that may have bee
98. and then select the  corresponding date using the selection lists   3  Click on the  Search  button to start the search     All the files that match the search criteria that you have entered will now be displayed in    a flat list  The dossier that contains the file will be displayed next to each file     11 11 3  Activating Files    While dossiers are generally activated for all users  the files that they contain are only    visible to other users if you have explicitly activated them     151       knowledgeTools    Click on the    Dossiers    tab    Click on  Open dossier  to access a list of your dossiers    Open a dossier by clicking on the    plus    sign in front of the name of the dossier   Select the file that you want to activate by clicking on the selection box in front of    the name of the file     4  Click on the  Clear  button below to activate the file  In addition  the name of the  file will be highlighted in red  so that you and other users will be able to quickly  recognize the newly activated file    11 11 4  Deleting Files  Click on the    Dossiers    tab   Click on  Delete Dossier  to access a list of your dossiers   Open a dossier by clicking on the    plus    sign in front of the name of the dossier   Select the file that you want to delete by clicking on the selection box in front of  the name of the file    4  Click on the  Delete  button below  Before deletion  you will be asked to confirm  whether you want to delete the file  Click on  Delete  to de
99. ange between the knowledge tree displayed in Internet    Explorer and Microsoft Word is implemented using a Word template  This template is    Supplied with the installation CD  the name of the file is    ktoo ls dot        This template must be copied to the user template directory of every workstation  In    order to find the template directory  proceed as follows     142      knowledgeTools    Open Microsoft Word   Open the    Tools    menu   Click on    Options    to open the    Options    window     Click on the    File Locations    tab in the    Options    window     te o o    A list of file locations for different file types will be displayed  Click on the line  labelled    User templates     The user template directory will be displayed on the  line labelled    User templates     Generally you will not see the full directory path  there  but a shortened path that will look something like this     C      Application Data Microsoft Templates        In order to view the full path of  the user template directory  first click on the path and then on the  Change   button in the window  The    Change Save Location    window will then open  Click  on the selection list at the top of this window     Templates    should normally be  displayed in the selection list   The selection list now opens and you can see the  full path to your template directory  Make a note of the directory  switch to  Windows Explorer and copy the file     ktoo s dot     from the installation CD to the 
100. ards to move the tree down  Scroll the wheel downwards to move  the tree up  By keeping the    Shift    key pressed  the tree can also be moved to the left or  the right     2 4 3  Additional Navigation Options    Your navigation through the tree is saved in the navigation bar  You can quickly return to  an earlier node by opening the navigation bar and clicking on the corresponding node in    the list that opens  However it is also possible to navigate step by step through the    previously accessed nodes by clicking on the    Back     4  or    Forward     b  icons in the    toolbar     19      knowledgeTools    If you know the path of a required node  it is also possible to enter the path directly into  the navigation bar  If you then click on the  Go To  button in the navigation bar  then the  relevant tree is opened up until the node in question  If you only know the node ID  you  can also enter only the node ID  The path of the node is now displayed in a new window     If you click on the path  then the corresponding node is displayed     2 4 4  Synopsis  Node IDs and Node Paths    Each node of a tree has a unique ID number  as well as a unique path  The ID is  automatically generated when a node is created and cannot be changed afterwards  In  order to display the ID of a node  open the    View    menu and then select the     Display Node ID    option from the    Edit    menu  A white number will be displayed at the  bottom right hand corner of every node   this is the 
101. art by clicking on the button labelled  Add New  Decision  in the window  Select the corresponding court from the list of  courts and then enter the file number of the decision in question  Repeat  these steps in order to add more decisions  Finish by clicking on the  Save     button to save your entries     Adding Decisions to a New Court  Start by clicking on the    A amp D    tab at the top of the screen   Click on the  New Court  button at the bottom of the screen   Enter the name of the court in the window that opens and then click on  Save      Follow the steps described above in steps 2 to 7     Editing Existing Decisions  Click on the    A amp D    tab at the top of the screen   Enter the file number of the decision that you want to edit in the input field    labelled    By File Number    and then click on  Display   or select the corresponding    89    3     8 4     E knowledgeTools    court in the selection list above and then click on the  Display  button on the  right  next to the selection list    You will now access a list that  depending on the above described method  will  either contain only the decision with the entered file number or all of the decisions  by the court that has been selected in the selection list    Click on the  Edit  button next to the decision that you want to edit and the  decision will open     Click on the  Edit  button next to the content that you want to edit     Entering Laws in the Legal Database    The web based editor can also be
102. ask window  Please then click on the Mf icon to remove the    successfully completed task from the task window     96         knowledgeTools    9  The Dataroom Module    The Dataroom Module not only provides you with a central saving location for files  but  also with a number of additional options for the administration  linking and use of your  files and documents  In order to use the Dataroom Module  your LOGOS server  installation should possess the corresponding licence  If this is the case  then you will    see an additional tab labelled    Dataroom    at the top of your screen     9 1  Creating Datarooms    1  Click on the    Dataroom    tab    2  Open the    Settings    menu and select the    Create New Dataroom    option   3  Enter a name for the new dataroom in the window that appears   4    Click on the  Save  button to create the new dataroom     9 2  Dataroom Management    The management of datarooms consists of    e creating and editing directories   e uploading  editing and indexing files   e configuring indexing   e creating new datarooms  In order to manage datarooms  you must possess the corresponding access rights  For  detailed information on the access rights are required in order to use specific functions   please refer to the table in chapter 15 5 further on in the User   s Manual  In any cases of  doubt  please contact the user administrator of your LOGOS server to find out about your    authorization level     9 2 1  Creating and Editing Directories  
103. ave created will be displayed in the new window that opens   Select the process that you want to open and click on it once with the mouse  confirm    this action by clicking on  Open      2 13 4  Managing Processes    You also have the option to manage saved processes by  e renaming or  e deleting them    In addition  it is also possible to organize processes in directories     2 13 5  Renaming Processes    Open the    Process    menu and select the    Manage Processes    option    2  Select the process that you want to rename from the list that appears by clicking  on it with the mouse  The name of the selected process is now displayed in the  input field labelled    Process       3  Delete the old name in the input field labelled    Process    and enter the new name  of the process    4  Click on the  Rename  button    Confirm your entry by clicking on the  OK  button in the next window     Close the    Manage Processes    window by clicking on the  X  button     32         knowledgeTools    2 13 6  Exporting Process Data    The user has the option to export data  which has been entered in a process  as an    XLS     file  e g  for further processing in MS Excel    Start by opening the corresponding process    Open the    Process    menu and select the option     Export Process Data       In the dialog box that appears  select whether you want to immediately open the       XLS    file or whether you want to save it to your hard disk           NOTE  Please note that by doing
104. ble for you to display the path of the  node  In order to do so  click on the node in question  open the    Navigation    menu and  select the    Node Address    option  The complete address  URL  of the node is now  displayed in a new window  The path of the node is displayed at the end of the address    after    path       2 5  Viewing Options    2 5 1  The Presentation Mode    It is also possible to view the tree in a special presentation mode  This mode provides an    enlarged view and is particularly suitable for presentations with a projector  beamer      Select the    Presentation Mode    option from the    View    menu or click on the Gd icon in    the toolbar     2 5 2  Using the Zoom Function  The user also has the option to enlarge or reduce the size of the display of the tree to    meet their needs  In order to enlarge the size of the tree  click on the O icon in the  toolbar until the tree is displayed in the required size  Alternatively  you can also select    the    Zoom in    option in the    View    menu     In order to reduce the size of the tree  click on the     icon in the toolbar until the tree is  displayed in the required size  Alternatively  you can also select the    Zoom out    option in  the    View    menu    If you want to display the tree in the original size  click on the option     Original Size     in  the    View    menu    In addition  you can also enlarge or reduce the size of the tree by using the scroll wheel  of the mouse  If you keep t
105. bution    window shows   e which amounts  expected values  can be realized  e with which probability  probability of occurrence     at the selected node in a graphical and tabular display     The highest expected value is always marked by a dotted line and displayed above the  line  the highest probability of occurrence is illustrated by a horizontal line and displayed  on the right next to line    The individual value combinations are illustrated by dots  These dots are connected by a  line  The line merely serves to provide a better understanding of the trends  the line does  not mean that there are further values in between the individual dots  If you move the  mouse pointer over the individual dots in the diagram  then the exact values  probability  of occurrence and expected value  that are represented by the dots are displayed    You have the option to download the diagram as a chart in    PNG    format  e g  in order to    integrate in a presentation   In order to do so  click on the W icon     The exact values are displayed in tabular form under the diagram     160      knowledgeTools    The first line of the table displays the probability with which the expected value O   e g  O EUR  will be realized in a grey font  Below it  the probability with which values  above O will be realized is displayed in a green font  You have the option to download the  values that are illustrated in the table as an MS Excel file  In order to do so  click on  the I icon     12 4  Additi
106. by clicking on  it once with the left mouse button   4  At the bottom of the screen  you will see two tabs labelled    Text Module  True        and    Text Module  False      Select which of the two text modules you want to edit    by clicking on it with the mouse and then click on the Ej icon at the top  right hand corner of the respective tab     5  Enter the required text and click on  Save      11 9 4  Integrating Input Fields    The user has the option to define input fields for every single node and to integrate these  in the text modules  The data which is later entered into the input fields by users is then  included in the generated document  Please note that the input fields are only available  at the node where they have been created and not throughout the entire tree   The integration of input fields occurs in two steps    1  Define the input fields that should generally be available at a node    2  Integrate one or more of these input fields in a text module of the node     144      knowledgeTools          NOTE  The creation of input fields is described in chapter 7 2        In order to integrate an input field that has already been created in a text module    proceed as follows    1  Open the tree that you want to edit and select the node that contains the text  modules where you want to integrate the input fields     2  Select which of the two text modules you want to edit by clicking on it with the    mouse and then click on the Ej icon at the top right hand c
107. cess  whereas a process is the  concrete record of which of these steps you  as the user  have edited and how you have  edited them    Processes are saved in dossiers  Each process contains information on when the process  was created  by which user and on the basis of which process template  Users have the  option to dynamically generate documents on the basis of processes from the    corresponding knowledge tree     11 8 1  Creating New Processes on the Basis of Process Templates    When using the Dossier Module  the creation of processes occurs on the basis of  previously created process templates  Processes are not created in the tree  but in    dossiers  As a result  it is possible to assign your working results to dossiers       N ew process  1  Enter a name for the new process   Letter  2  Please select a template    Templates  EY Correspondence     B Letter       Fig   The    New Process    window    In order to create a process  proceed as follows   1  Click on the    Dossiers    tab and then on    Open Dossiers      2  Select the dossier where you want to create the process by clicking on the name  of the corresponding dossier   3  Click on the button labelled  New Process  at the bottom of the screen and the       New Process    window will open     137      knowledgeTools    4  The process templates that are available on your server will be displayed in their  directories in this window  Open the required template directory by clicking on the     plus    sign in f
108. cessary to physically have to access the  server as a user with administrative access rights at operating system level  The server  can now be accessed from anywhere   In addition  the web console can be used by both Windows installations  as well as Linux  installations  However  certain functions that are available when using the server console  are not available when using the web console   The following functions are available in the web console    e Starting   Stopping the Server   e Installing Patches   e Creating Backups    e Accessing Log Files    NOTE  Please note that the web console should not be permanently open  but rather  only to complete administrative tasks  Please exit the web console once you have  completed your work by clicking on the    Log out    at the top right hand corner of the web    console     18 2 1  Accessing the Web Console    NOTE  In order to access the LOGOS web console  you must possess the       User Administrator    administrative access right     Open your web browser    2  Enter the address of the LOGOS web console and press the Enter key  The  address is     http   your_server_name Port admin     whereby the port has been  set in the LOGOS server console during the installation of the LOGOS server and  can also be changed later  In the default setting Port 81 is used     3  Login with your user access data     204       E knowledgeTools    4  You will access the web console interface  see next illustration           LOGOS Web Console 
109. clicking on it once with the mouse  and then click on the recycle bin    icon     10  Click on  Apply  to save the list and close the dialog box     If you have created several input fields  you can change the order in which the fields are    displayed by moving the fields up or down using the black arrow icons     In order to delete an input field  simply click on the recycle bin icon in front of the name    of the input field     7 2 2     Editing Existing Input Fields    If a node has an input field  then this will be indicated by the presence of a blue icon at    the bottom right hand corner of the node     75    E knowledgeTools    If you move the mouse pointer over this icon  the labels of the existing input fields for  the node will be displayed  In addition  the labels will be coloured as follows  see figure    e green  if the input field has been assigned the condition    True     e red  if the input field has been assigned the condition    False       e black  if the input field has been assigned the condition    Marked       First assumption  m     F Available fields          Second assumption  Conclusion pt 1  Input field 1  2  Input field 2         Third assumption    d       Fig   A node with input fields    You can edit the existing input fields by clicking on the icon in the node when in editor  mode  Alternatively  you can also open the    Edit    menu and select the    Edit Input Fields     option  The    Input Fields    window will now open and the existing
110. d files from your personal PC or your  network to a dossier  These files may contain  e g  scanned correspondence  Excel    charts  presentations  videos or graphics     11 11 1  Adding New Files to Dossiers    Click on the    Dossiers    tab   Click on  Open Dossier  to access a list of your dossiers   Select the dossier that you want to add the file to by clicking on the name of the  dossier   4  Click on the  New File  button   Click on the  Browse  button in the window that opens   In the next window  navigate to the file that you want to upload  select it by  clicking on it with the mouse and then click on  Open    7  Click on the  Upload  button to upload the file     11 11 2  Searching for Existing Files    You have the option to search for files using the name of the file  the date that the file  was uploaded or the name of the user that uploaded the file   1  Click on the    Dossiers    tab   2  Click on    Search Dossiers    to open the search window   If you want to search for a file by name  then enter the name in the input field  labelled    Search Term    and click on the selection button labelled    Search in  Filenames      If you want to search for the user that uploaded the file  then enter the name in  the input field labelled    Search Term    and click on the selection button labelled     Search for Creator      If you want to search for a file by the date that it was uploaded  then start by  clicking on the selection button labelled    Search by Date    
111. d select the    Add Administrator    option  Enter the e   mail address of the user that you would like to add as an administrator in the  window that opens  Enter a password of your choice for the user in the field  below  Please note that the password must contain at least 6 characters    3  Re enter the password in the field below     4  Finish by clicking on the  Save  button     198      knowledgeTools    18 1 4  Changing User Passwords    The server console allows you to change the passwords of existing users  In order to do  so  proceed as follows    1  Start the LOGOS server console if it is not already open  Open the Windows Start  menu and go to the    LOGOS    program group  Select    LOGOS Server Console    in  the    LOGOS    program group    Open the    Options    menu and select the    Reset User Password    option    In the window that now opens  use the    User    selection list to select the user  whose password you want to change  Please note that only the user names     e mail addresses  of the users are displayed in the selection list    4  Enter a password of your choice for the user in the field labelled    Password     The  password must contain at least 6 characters   Re enter the password in the field below     Finish by clicking on the  Save  button     18 1 5  Installing Patches    The LOGOS server has an integrated patch system with which you can download and  install the latest patches and bugfixes from the Internet  Alternatively  you can also  
112. d that the full text search cannot be performed for the file     9 2 3     Uploading Multiple Files    You not only have the option to upload individual files  but also to import multiple files or    entire directories  including all the files and possible subdirectories that they may    contain  into an existing dataroom     In order to do so  you must first compress the files or directories that you want to upload    into a single    ZIP    file using a file compression program     i    Start by selecting the dataroom and the directory  where you want to upload the  new files to  by clicking on it with the mouse    Click on    Bulk upload    at the bottom of the screen    Click on the  Browse  button in the window that opens and select the directory  where the    ZIP    file is saved    Select the    ZIP    file by clicking on it with the mouse and then click on the  Open   button    Please then click on the  OK  button    The task window will open after the successful upload of the file  In this window   the import of the    ZIP    file will be displayed as a new task that is to be executed   Please click on the P icon to start the import process  If you want to delete the    import task  then please click on the Mf icon     98          knowledgeTools    7  After the successful import  the message     Completed Successfully     will be  displayed in the task window  Please then click on the icon to remove the    successfully completed task from the task window     9 2 4  E
113. delete a section  all the subordinate elements will also be deleted    Example  if you delete section 1  then sections 1 1 and 1 2  including any text blocks    that they may contain  will also be deleted         10 5  Integrating Existing Scripts in Trees    You have the option to integrate scripts that exist on the server in a tree  In order to do  so  you must possess read access to the script that you want to integrate  see above    1  Open a tree in editor mode   2  Open the    Navigation    menu and click on the    Open Technical Tree Properties     option   Scroll down to    Scripts and file shares      4  Click on the    Select Scripts    selection list below it  All of the existing scripts on the  server  for which you possess at least read access  will be displayed in the list   Click on the script that you want to integrate  You can also click on more than one  Script   Click on the  Save  button   The    Technical Tree Properties    window will close  Click on the  Reload  button   the client will reload and the selected script s  will be displayed on the right hand    side of the screen     10 6  Links Between Nodes and Text Sections    In the default version  you can create links between the nodes of a tree and individual  files  e g  documents  In this case  however  the link is always to the entire document    On the other hand  if you are using scripts  a node can be linked to different sections of a  script or even different sections of different scripts    
114. des that have been marked    either red or green and possess the respective text module  Texts that are attached to    143         knowledgeTools    nodes that have not been marked  or marked as    Not Checked     are not included in the  document   The sequence in which the text modules are included in the document is fixed  Therefore   it is important to visualize the way in which the text modules are arranged  There are  three basic rules   1  The text modules of the parent nodes are inserted before the text modules of the  respective child nodes   2  The text modules of the child nodes are inserted from top to bottom in the  document   3  The text modules of a tree section are only inserted into the document after the  text modules of the previous tree section have been inserted   However  you have the opportunity to edit the order and the content of the text modules    again before they are sent to MS Word  please refer to chapter 11 10 1      11 9 3  Preparing the Knowledge Tree for Document Generation    Before it is possible to generate documents from a knowledgeTool  it is first necessary to  create the required text modules in the Structure Editor   1  Open the tree that you want to edit in editor mode  Please note that you must  possess write access to the tree   2  Make sure that the tree is assigned the application type     Document Generator      in the    Technical Tree Properties    window   3  Select the node where you want to attach one or more text modules 
115. display the sidebar     9 4 4  Creating Links Between Nodes and Files    The creation of links between the files and nodes of a tree occurs in two steps     start by selecting the dataroom that you want the tree to access      then link the individual files of the dataroom to the nodes of the tree           NOTE  You can also determine that a tree can access more than one dataroom and    consequently  also the files that it contains        In order to link the nodes of a tree to files in a dataroom  proceed as follows    1  Open the tree in structure editor mode    2  Open the    Navigation    menu and click on the option     Open Technical Tree  Properties       3  Scroll down to    Scripts and file shares       4  Click on the lower selection list labelled    Select file shares       5  All of the available datarooms will now be displayed in the list  Select one or more  datarooms by clicking on them once with the left mouse button    6  Click on the  Save  button  The    Technical Tree Properties    window will now close  and a dialog box will appear  Click on the  Reload  button in the dialog box and  the sidebar will appear on the right hand side of the screen with the datarooms  that you have selected    You can now link individual files in the sidebar to the nodes of the tree    1  In the tree  navigate to the node that you want to link a file to    2  In the sidebar  navigate to the file that you want to link to the node    3  Click on the name of the file with the ri
116. diting Files  Moving  Copying  Renaming and Deleting     The following options are available for files on the server  e Moving  e Copying  e Renaming  e Deleting  If you want to move a file from one directory to another directory  then proceed as    follows     Click on the file in question with the right mouse button    Select the    Cut    option from the shortcut menu with the left mouse button    Click on the name of the directory that you want to move the file to with the right  mouse button and select the    Insert    option from the shortcut menu by clicking on    it with the left mouse button  The file will now be moved to this directory     In order to ensure data consistency on the server  files cannot be physically copied from  one directory to another directory  Therefore  each file can only exist once on the server     However  you have the option to create a link to a file in another directory     Click on the original file with the right mouse button    Select the    Copy    option from the shortcut menu with the left mouse button    Click on the name of the directory where you want to create a link to the file with  the right mouse button and select the    Insert Link    option from the shortcut menu  by clicking on it with the left mouse button  A link to the original file will now be    inserted in the directory  If users click on this link  the original file will be opened     In order to rename a file  proceed as follows   1  Click on the original file wit
117. dow     Data Exchange  Exporting a knowledgeTool to a File          NOTE  You must possess the    Tree Admin    administrative access right in order to be able    to perform this task        Click on the    Knowledge     tab    Click on the name of the knowledgeTool that you want to export with the right  mouse button    Select the    Export    option from the context menu that opens    The task window will now open  In this window  the export of the knowledgeTool  will be displayed as a new task that is to be executed  Please click on the    icon to  start the export process  If you want to delete the export task  then please click    on the iif icon     47               knowledgeTools    5  After the successful export  the message     Completed Successfully     will be  displayed in the task window  Click on the icon to download the exported  knowledgeTool    6  Please then click on the M   icon to remove the successfully completed task from    the task window     The user has the option to export a KnowledgeTool to a product file without including files  that have been directly integrated into the tool using the File Managers  i e  not using  links to a dataroom  in the product file  This may  for example  be useful if the  knowledge tree that you want to export contains data quantities that are so large that  they would result in the product file now being able to fit on a conventional data carrier    In order to export a knowledgeTool to a product file without files  sta
118. dow will open  in which you will be informed that    the client must now reload  Please confirm this by clicking on  Reload      12 2  Entering Probabilities    When you open a knowledgeTool that has the application type     Risk Analysis     activated   for the first time  all the nodes initially have a probability of occurrence between 0  and  100   aS a more accurate statement regarding the probability of occurrence for the  individual node has not yet been made  The node is therefore in the state of the greatest  possible uncertainty  This status is displayed by an orange coloured bar on the left hand    side of the node     154    E knowledgeTools    If you move the mouse pointer over the G icon in the bottom left hand corner of a node   then the current probability of occurrence of the events that are illustrated in the node     will be displayed in a tooltip  see figure      im  0 00   100 00   lusion nd assumption l    d assumption       Fig   A tooltip displaying the current probability of occurrence    Nodes can be given an exact probability of occurrence or a range of possible probabilities  of occurrence  Consequently  the following values are possible    e a value of 0 per cent   e a value of 100 per cent   e a value between O per cent and 100 per cent  e g  65     e a range between one selected value and another selected value between   O per cent and 100 per cent  e g  20  to 30     Thereby  a value of O per cent is equivalent to the node being marked as    Fal
119. e    blue arrow  All the nodes that are linked to the files will be displayed in the selection    window  In order to display one of these nodes  simply click on the node title     108      knowledgeTools    9 4 1  Opening Files    In the sidebar  the files are displayed in the hierarchical directory structure of the  dataroom  In order to display the contents of a directory  click on the name of the  directory with the left mouse button  If the directory contains files  then these will be  displayed under the name of the directory    If the directory contains subdirectories  then a    plus    sign will be displayed in front of the  name of the directory  Click on it once to open the directory structure and display the  subdirectories    If you move the mouse pointer over the name of the file  an information window will    appear with the properties of the respective file     The following properties will be displayed   e Filename  e Technical ID of the file  e Application type of the file  e g  Word or Excel   e Technical checksum of the file  e Creation date of the file  when the file was originally created   e Upload date of the file  when the file was originally uploaded to this server   e Uploaded by  who uploaded the file to the server   e Searchability  whether the contents of the file can be searched in with the    integrated full text search     In order to open a file  click on the filename once with the right mouse button and a  shortcut menu will appear  Click on 
120. e left mouse button   If the    Properties    window is not visible  then follow steps 2 and 3  otherwise  continue with step 4    Click on the node once with the right mouse button    Select the    Properties    option from the menu that opens    Enter the title of the node in the field labelled    Title       Enter the alternative text of the node in the field labelled    Alttext     the alternative  text is displayed when you move over the node with the mouse pointer   If you do  not enter anything in the    Alttext    field  then the title text will automatically be  used as the alternative text    If required  select the node colour from the drop down list    If required  select a weighting factor by clicking on either the red  green or yellow  check box     Click on the  Save  button to save your changes     Editing Associations    Nodes are associated with each other according to the knowledgeTools logic  The type of    association between the parent node and the subordinate child node is determined by the    parent node     The following types of association exist     And   Or   Exclusive  Not And  Not Or  Not Exclusive  Virtual    The    Virtual    association is the standard association between a parent node and a newly    created child node  You can determine the type of logical association in the    Properties       window   1  Select the respective parent node by clicking on it once with the left mouse  button   2  Open the    Node Properties    window if it is n
121. e not connected with the  tree structure    Select the node that you want to delete from the list by clicking on it with the  mouse  You may select more than one node    Click on the  Delete  button     58      knowledgeTools          NOTE  The node will be immediately deleted without any additional steps        You also have the option to delete the entire contents of the recycle bin by clicking on  the  Delete All  button     5 18  The Undo and Redo Functions    By using the undo function  you can undo all changes that have been made to the node    properties  including changes to the additional information of the node     Move the mouse pointer to the   icon in the toolbar  A text  shaded in yellow  will  appear indicating changes that you can undo by clicking on the icon  Click on the icon to  undo the change     As the counterpart to the undo function  the user can also use redo function  Move the    mouse pointer to the   icon in the toolbar  A text  shaded in yellow  will appear showing    you the changes  which have been effected by clicking on the undo icon  that can be    redone or cancelled by clicking on the   icon  Click on the icon to cancel the changes    that have been made by clicking on undo     5 19  Switching Between the Editor and Normal Modes    When you are in editor mode  you have the option to access different views of the open  knowledgeTool  These views can be configured in the    Navigation    menu    e Display Preview  this option opens the curren
122. e of a table of contents    The user can create a table of contents for the entire tree or limit the table of contents by  specifying that it should be created from the selected node onwards  In this case  you    must click on the node that you want the creation of the table of contents to start at   before creating the table of contents     In order to create a table of contents  proceed as follows   1  Open the    Navigation    menu in the tree and click on    Create Table of Contents      2  Select the settings that you want to create the table of contents with in the    window that appears  see below for further details      80    E knowledgeTools    3  Click on the  OK  button to start creating the table of contents  Please note that  the creation may take longer depending on the size of the tree and the selected    settings     Table of contents for demo   Mozilla Firefox   m X    Datei Bearbeiten Ansicht Chronik Lesezeichen Extras Hilfe     i knowledgeTools        Table of contents for demo B i  5 knowledgeTools    Table of contents       Selected tree  demo 30      switch to current version    Options  Node label  line numbers a oO show node ID    Show node color  as icon    Include document part   none   i gray background    File format HTML       O Show input fields     Y  Include modules only one time each    Restrict output to specific nodes    Restrict to colored nodes     all colors   Restrict to weighted nodes   all weights   LI Restrict to path  2  C  Eingrenz
123. e of the  process will be highlighted in red  so that you and other users will be able to    quickly recognize the newly activated process     140       knowledgeTools    11 8 7  Copying Processes    Processes may be copied within the same dossier  This may  for example  be useful if you  have already entered a large quantity of data into a process and only want to change  some of the entries without losing the entries that you have made    Click on the    Dossiers    tab    Click on  Open Dossier  to access a list of your dossiers     Open the dossier by clicking on the    plus    sign in front of the name of the dossier       a 2    Select the process that you want to activate by clicking on the selection box in  front of the name of the process   Click on the  Copy  button at the bottom     Ul    Enter the name that you want to give to the copy of the process in the window  that appears  Alternatively  you can also use the name that is provided by the  system  In addition  by using the    Version    selection list  you can determine  whether you want the last updated  editable  version of a process or an older   not editable  version of the process to be copied  If you decide to copy an older  version  then it will be copied and you will be able to edit the copy  unlike with the    Original     11 8 8  Deleting Processes    Click on the    Processes    tab and then on  Delete Process  in order to access a list of all  your dossiers  Open a dossier by clicking on the    plu
124. e of the dataroom with the left mouse button    Open the    Settings    menu and select the menu option     Configure Indexing       You can now access an empty page by clicking on the  Add New Category  button     Enter the name of the first new category in the input field that now appears     aS    By using the drop down list on the right of the input field  select the type of  category that you want to add  The following categories are available      Keyword  only text can be entered in this field category      Date  only dates can be entered in this field category    Click on  Add New Category  to add another category or    Click on  Save  to save your entries     9 2 7  Indexing Files    Once the indexing has been configured  you can assign keywords to the individual files   1  Select the file that you want to index by clicking on the name of the file with the  right mouse button   2  Click on the    Properties    option in the shortcut menu with the left mouse button   On the next page  the selected properties of the file and the input fields for the    keywords will be displayed     101       E3 knowledgeTools    4  The    Date    fields can be recognized by the drop down lists  Enter a date by using  the drop down list to select the required date  The    Keyword    fields are basic  input fields into which you can enter normal text    5  Once you have entered the keywords  click on the  Save  button to save your    entries     e knowledgeTools   Mozilla Firefox BAX   
125. ecdcevenecdearenucdcenenececesees 181  TOAS FOA N aoee EEAO EOE EAE 181  16 3  Tree Related Access Rights          ssssssnsssssssnssnsnssrsnessnnsssnnesnsnesnsnesnsnennesenne 181  LOk CAG ACCO G spines ccdee ten cecendenecennanntanancnatapandsntaanenatenaneteneceendececeeeees  181  TO GI CCC SS ac actten amen cc cn dened neem eeeat eevee set eareeen ee eee eee ree 182  16 3 3  Process Analysis ACCESS ccccsccwncciaasiesigvessadesndsaneoneasndcesieratersvasanennnarans 182  16 4  Special Access Rights When Using Add On ModuleS      sesessssasesensssrrerersssns 183  16 4 1  Special Access Rights When Using the Dataroom Module              sseeee 183  16 4 2  Special Access Rights When Using the Dossier Module             ccceeeeeeeee 183  16 4 3  Special Access Rights When Using the Tutorial Module  ssssssssesesessssssesn  184  16 5  Tapular SUMMA rocoso nina ae iiO 184  17  USING StAtTISTICS vrcwaswisseannnceadaceconcgsacnnarutunsapasessedseuenssnuias usuusessanseesaeennnunun 188  17 1  The Analysis of Created ProCeSSe         cccceeeeeeeeeeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeueauuuuuueuuauaaaas 188  17 2  The Graphical Process Analysis         cccsccceseeeeceeeeeeeeeecccesennnaneeeeeeessseeeeaaaes 189  17 3  Graphical Process Analysis and Risk ANn   lySIS        ccccccceeeeeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeenaees 190  17 3 1  Displaying the Average Probability of Occurrence             cece cece e eens 192  17 3 2  Displaying the Average Expected Value         ssssssesssrsrsnrsrrnrsrrnrsnrnrsrenns 193  17 4  the 
126. ection up to    Heading 2    would then be able to be  linked     If you have selected more than one text section as a section that can be linked  but have  not linked them  then you can quickly access these sections by using a special search  function  In order to do so  click on the line labelled    Display Sections That Are Not  Linked    in the sidebar    The number of sections that are not linked in the document will now be displayed  The  first section that is found will be displayed directly below  By clicking on the    In Context     link  you can directly access the position of the section in the full document    If more than one section that is not linked has been found  then you can access the next    section in the search results by clicking on the    Next Result    link     You can also cancel the marking of a text section by clicking on the a anchor icon   After you have defined the sections of the document that you want to attribute the link    option  you can then link these sections in the next step     122    E knowledgeTools    In order to do so  proceed as follows   1  In the tree  navigate to the node that you want to link a text section to   2  If this has not yet occurred  select the text section that you want to link by  attributing the link option to the text section using the anchor as described above   3  Click on the    chain icon  The text section and the node are now linked     In this way  you can link several nodes with the same text section  I
127. ed    Read    to only grant the selected  user read access to the knowledgeTool  click on the check box in the column  labelled    Edit    to allow the user to edit and or work on the knowledgeTool  click  on the check box in the column labelled    Edit    to grant the user the ability to edit  the tree structure of the knowledgeTool     10  Finish by clicking on the  Save  button to apply the changes     4 4  Data Exchange  Importing Scripts from a File    You also have the option to import scripts from a file  see the section on    The Script  Editor    later on in the User   s Manual  in the same way as a knowledgeTool  In particular   this becomes absolutely necessary when you want to import a knowledgeTool that is  linked to a script  Scripts are also saved as product files with the    KIP    filename    extension     43         knowledgeTools          NOTE  You must possess the    Tree Admin    administrative access right in order to be able    to perform this task              NOTE  When importing a script that is linked to a knowledgeTool  it is essential that first    the script and then the knowledgeTool are imported        Click on the    Options    tab    Please then click on    Import Product File       Click on the  Browse  button in the window that opens and select the directory  where the product file that you want to import is saved  Select the corresponding  file by clicking on it with the mouse and then please click on the  Open  button    4  Please then cl
128. ed directly by a question mark  term   then all words that consist of    term    and precisely one more character will be    searched for  e g     terms        Once the search has been completed  the number of search results  as well as the first  search result and its location  will be displayed  The entered search terms you will be  highlighted in green in the search results and the heading of the text section in which the  search result is located will also be displayed    If there is more than one search result  then you can display the next search result by  clicking on    Next Result        Click on  Cancel  to return to the overall view of the document     124    E knowledgeTools    If you want to display the text within the context of the overall document  then click on     In Context     The overall document will now be opened at the position where the search    result is located           knowledgeTools   Mozilla Firefox alfa X lt     Datei Bearbeiten Ansicht Chronik Lesezeichen Extras Hilfe    Dossiers Knowledge Tutorials Datarooms Reporting Templates Options    YX    QG eXr M    OCHO  RAM 4 FTE IoR eB    j2secondessumion Le  wren  sex  Cacan   demo   Version 33 a Cl search for page number  iil i nc 3 texts have been found   Heading 1  Second assumption    Title  in context ee    EM ipsum dolor sit amet  consetetur sadipscing elitr  sed diam  nonumy eirmod tempor invidunt ut labore et dolore magna    aliquyam erat  sed diam voluptua  At vero eos et accusam et    Al
129. ed to in the following as    Sections      which can have text blocks assigned to them     10 3 1  Creating Sections    1     3     Click on the name of the script in order to create the first section of the script     Click on the a icon in the toolbar of the Script Editor    A window will open on the left  next to the Script Editor  where you can enter the  name of the new section    Enter the name in the window and click on  Save   The section has now been    created and will be displayed in the Script Editor window     You now have the option to create more sections on the same level or to create new    sections below the newly created section     Sections are always created below the currently selected element     In order to create a section on the same level  click on the name of the script and  the script name will be coloured  then repeat steps 2 to 4   In order to create a section below the newly created section  click on the name of    the section  the section name will be coloured  repeat steps 2 to 4     In this way  you can create a hierarchical document structure  Once you have determined    the structure of the document by creating the headings  you can enter the text of the    script under the heading     10 3 2  Creating Text Blocks    i    3     Select the section that you want to add a text block to by clicking on it with the    mouse     Click on the A icon in the toolbar of the Script Editor    A window will open on the left  next to the Script Editor  Y
130. effect on the selected node and not on  the respective child nodes of the node in question  which will remain in the tree    structure     1  Click on the node that you want to extract  This node must be positioned between  a parent node and at least one child node     2  Open the    Edit    menu in the menu bar     3  Click on    Extract Node     Alternatively  you can click on the 2 icon in the toolbar    This function is also available in the shortcut menu     4  The extracted node disappears and the subsequent child node s  take its place   The logical association remains the same as it was between the parent node and    the extracted node     56       knowledgeTools    5 14 3  Cutting Nodes    The    Cut Node    option removes the node in question from the tree structure and copies  the node to the clipboard  The cut node is shaded grey until it is inserted at another  position in the tree    1  Click on the node that you want to cut     2  Open the    Edit    menu in the menu bar     PE  mu    3  Click on    Cut Node     Alternatively  you can click on the     icon in the toolbar     5 15  Reinserting Previously Removed Nodes    As described above  the user has the option to reinsert nodes that have been removed  from the tree  The procedure for inserting removed nodes depends on how the node has    been removed from the tree structure     5 15 1  Inserting a Cut Node    1  Click on the node in the tree structure where you want the cut node to be  inserted     2  Open t
131. eletion of the directory  the message     Completed  Successfully     will be displayed in the task window  Please then click on the mM icon    to remove the successfully completed task from the task window     9 2 6  Configuring Indexing    You have the option to assign certain predefined keywords to every file on the server   If this function is in use  it will not only be possible to search for files by using their  filename or content  but also by using the keywords   For example  if one entered the  keywords    Smith    and    Jones    for a search  one would be able to find all the files that  were assigned these keywords  regardless of their content or filenames      This indexing of individual files must be prepared by determining which categories of  keywords should be available for the files in each dataroom  The categories that are  available are  e g     Author Name    or    Company Name       The categories apply for the entire dataroom and therefore the keywords in the individual    categories can be assigned to every file within the dataroom     100         knowledgeTools       knowledgeTools   Mozilla Firefox BAX    Datei Bearbeiten Ansicht Chronik Lesezeichen Extras Hilfe       Start Dossiers Knowledge Tutorials Datarooms Reporting Templates Options A amp D    E    Author  Keyword v  Add new category       E Fertig          Fig   The indexing settings    1  In order to configure the indexing  first select a dataroom in the File Manager by  clicking on the nam
132. embers of the user group to be able to  access under    Access rights for knowledge areas        Finish by clicking on  Save  to save your entries and create the new user group     Searching for Existing User Groups    Click on the    Users    tab to open the user administration start page    Enter the name of the user group that you want to search for in the field labelled     Search For User Group    and click on  Search    Alternatively  you can click on the  button labelled  Show All User Groups  to display a complete list of all the existing  user groups     If one or more user groups are found that match the search term that you have  entered  then the names of the user groups will be displayed in the list of search  results  You can access more information about the selected user group by    clicking on the name of the user group     Deleting Existing User Groups    Deleting user groups is generally the same as deleting users  Search for the user group    that you want to delete as described above and click on the name of the user group     Click on the button labelled  Delete User Group  at the bottom of the screen and    acknowledge the security prompt by clicking on  OK      178       knowledgeTools    16  Access Rights System    LOGOS has an authorization system with a tiered system of access rights    Access rights can be assigned to users  as well as user groups  The access rights that are  granted to a member of a user group are the same as the rights that are g
133. en auf Knoten mit Zusatzinformationen  O Include nodes that satisfy only one search condition    Ll show complete subtrees for each node found    Highlight differences between knowledgeTrees    Compare to   none     Version     Server  AllegroServe 1 2 24    ee          Fig   The settings for the creation of a table of contents    The following configuration settings are available for the creation of a table of contents     Node Label  Using the drop down list  choose whether   e the individual lines of the table of contents are numbered consecutively    e the technical path of each node is displayed in front of the respective node    Show Node ID  Apply a tick to the check box if you want the Node ID to be displayed in front of the    name of the node   Show Node Colour    This option is only relevant if the nodes of the tree have been assigned colour markings     If applicable  use the drop down list to select one of the following options     81      knowledgeTools    e the colour marking that has been assigned to the node should be displayed as a  correspondingly coloured icon in front of the name of the node  e the name of the node should be coloured in accordance with the marking    e the text should be displayed with a correspondingly coloured background    Include Document Part   The user not only has the option to display the node title in the table of contents  but  also the additional information that has been assigned to the node  In the default  version  no additi
134. eration of documents  as described above  but they  can also be used for the collection of data  e g  for the purpose of statistical analysis  In  this case it is possible to assign input fields to each node  the input fields are only visible  to the user when analysing a process  the data that is entered in the fields is saved in  the respective process    The data that is entered in the input fields is only used for document generation if the  input fields are integrated in text modules as described above    Each input field has an individual name  label  by which it can later be identified  As the  author  you can determine    e the type of entry that can be made in the fields  e g  only integers or dates    e the conditions under which the input field becomes visible  i e  when the  corresponding node is marked as either    True    or    False     or if one of the two  markings has been set at all    Please note that input fields can always only belong to one specific node and do not apply    for the entire tree     73    7 2 1        knowledgeTools    Creating Input Fields    The following types of input fields are available     Character String   any characters  letters  numbers  can be entered in the input  field   Integer   only integers can be entered in the input field  only numbers without  decimal points can be entered    Floating Point Number   numbers with decimal points can be entered in the  input field   Shortlist   users can select a value  text or number  f
135. es  before the first node      5 11     Click on the node that you want to insert a new node before     Open the    Edit    menu in the menu bar     Click on    Insert New Node Before     Alternatively you can also use the a icon in  the toolbar    A new  empty node will now be inserted before the node in question    Open the    Properties    window    Enter the properties of the new node  node title  alternative text and  where  applicable  colour  in the    Properties    window and then save them    If necessary  change the logical association of the new node to the node behind it    and before it     Copying a Node    Click on the node that you want to copy     Open the    Edit    menu in the menu bar     Click on    Copy Node     Alternatively  you can click on the    icon in the toolbar   This function is also available in the shortcut menu    Click on the node to that you want to attach the copy of the node to as a child  node     Open the    Edit    menu in the menu bar     Click on    Insert     Alternatively  you can click on the E icon in the toolbar   This  function is also available in the shortcut menu   The copy of the node will now be  created     Open the    Properties    window     54    5 12     5 13       knowledgeTools    Using the    Properties    window  click on the parent node and determine how you  want it to be logically associated with the node that has just been created or  use    the pie menu     Copying a Tree Section    Click on the parent node 
136. espectively  the events that are  represented by the nodes  can no longer only be marked as    True    or    False     but may  now alternatively be assigned a probability of occurrence between 0  and 100   which  can be used in the calculation of the overall probability of occurrence    Each individual node may also optionally have a value in EUR        USD     or GBP        The expected value for the node is calculated in accordance with the probability of  occurrence of the corresponding node    In order to use the Risk Analysis Module  you require the corresponding licence on your  LOGOS server     12 1  Using Risk Analysis in knowledgeTools    In order to use the risk analysis functions in a knowledgeTool  the application type     Risk  Analysis     must first be activated for the corresponding tree in the technical tree  properties    1  Open the knowledgeTool  Please note that in order to perform this operation  you  must possess the right to edit the knowledge    2  Open the    Navigation    menu and select the option     Open Technical Tree  Properties       3  Select the    Risk Analysis    option from the    Application Type    selection list    4  You now have the option to determine whether the expected values should also  be calculated in the tree  In order to do so  select the check box labelled     Expected Values     Select the currency that you want the expected values to be  calculated in from the selection list behind it    5  Click on  Save  and a new win
137. esseeeeeeceeeeeeeseeecesuneneeeneeeeseeeeeanans 84   8 1 2  Accessing Laws in a knowledgeTool        sssssesnsnsnnnnsrnnnsrrnnsnenrnrenrrrrnrrrene 85  8 2  MICWING DEION soraan E EE E A a EEEE EERE 86   8 2 1  Viewing Decisions in the DatabaSe         ccccccccceeeceeeeeeeeeeeee eens seeeeeeeaaaaaes 86   8 2 2  Accessing Decisions in a knowledgeTool        ccc cecccceeeeeeeee seen eens eeeeeeaaaaees 87  8 3  Entering Decisions in the Legal Database           cc cece cece cece eeeeeeee eee eeenees 87   8 3 1  POATA COUNTS  ctacaaqones es aa E E E T tus satnbianeee cryin 88   8 3 2  Adding Decisions to an Existing COUrt         cccccccccceeeeee seen eee e ee eeeeeeeeaaanaes 88   8 3 3  Adding Decisions to a New COUurt        ccccsseeeeeeeeeeesscccesssnnnennneeeeessssoeeaas 89   8 3 4  Editing EXisung DECISIONS sansanesaanssepes tesaewinensenstatanencsmeaensniawiaieraenneciess 89  8 4  Entering Laws in the Legal Database          s sssssssnsnrsrsnrsrerenrrrrnrerrnrenrerenrrnne 90   8 4 1  ENGCHihnG  NOW LAWS ssaceveaisacecortassenntonsteceneattustuunangeacubderearsanndonumaaeyoauess 90  8 5  Managing Laws and Decisions   Exporting  Importing and Deleting               93   8 5 1  EXPONO LAW aprann eO E E E E E E EA 93      knowledgeTools    9 5 2  DeC UN I CAWS coroin E ANA 94  8 5 3  ExpOrNO DECISIONS concwnsveveataicest aneeredeansauedaeaiaeceseneniceswaesidcamneniasaea  95  8 5 4  Deleting DECISIONS srerireireeian area aA 95  8 5 5  Importing Laws and DeciSsionS           s ss
138. esssssrsrsnrerenrrrrnnrrenrrrrnnrenrnrenenns 143  11 9 3  Preparing the Knowledge Tree for Document Generation      s sssssssrssrru 144  11 94  Integrating INDUE FICIGS viccsaccaciaistenaiacnenseeraeaseenmmannecetesscetestrateeetnrases 144  11 9 5  Integrating Master Data Fields              ccc cece scene eee eeeeeeesseeceesnaneneeseeenegs 145  P1296  USING Ne Sidebar sesecnnnenetesteciapmantaehessatestipanaestrmameeteusetxetenintiateeets 146  11 10  DOCUMENT GENClAUNOMinniostinontautinsiwetnaeensesienaneatoumusrnaeieeianentaenderesen 146  11 10 1  Editing Generated DOCUMENTS           ccccsseeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeessnnnennneeeeesnegs 147  11 10 2  Saving and Accessing Generated Documents in Dossiers              0008  150    E knowledgeTools    Lills Working With FIOS correire eaa aae 151  11 11 1  Adding New Files to DOSSIELS           cccccc cece cece eee ee eeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeennags 151  11 11 2  Searching for Existing FileS           cccccceceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaags 151  Illi  Achivating FUG rasieren ne E a 151  11 11 4  DETO FIOS arinaa AE E 152   11 12  DOSSICl INOUCS orere rE A A AENA 152  1112  Creating  NOW NOOS wauscree atacand agen ed cednaddaneon EE TNES 152  11 12 2  Opening and Editing Existing Notes            ccccccccecceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeenas 153  DAES  AVANO NOTOS spcene te nien acs etevacececen asec tance E EARO scan betececes  153  11 12 4  DeO NOLS orrena A EAE A AON 153   12  Risk Analysis Using knowledge  ooOlS       s ssss2          
139. export content   such as knowledge trees  scripts  laws and decisions    By using the    Tutorials    tab  you can access video based tutorials and the  authoring system for creating such tutorials   this tab is only visible if the Tutorial  Module is installed on your server    By using the    Datarooms    tab  you can access the dataroom administration    Only visible if the Dataroom Module is installed on your server     By using the    Users    tab  you can access the user database  You can also create     edit or delete users or user groups in this tab     17          knowledgeTools    The    Start    tab has an additional special function  This tab is only visible when using the  Dossier Module and is the first thing that is displayed after every login    The three most recent dossiers  processes and files are displayed on the right side of the     Start    page  These may include dossiers  processes and files  which have been created  by other users and activated for your use  as well as those that you have created  yourself  By clicking on the    more       link and selecting the corresponding option  you can  also switch to a general view of all the dossiers  processes and files    You can change your personal password in the  Settings  section  In order to do so  click  on    Change Password     Please note when entering your new password  that it should be  made up of at least six characters and should not be easy for others to guess    You can search for dossiers 
140. fields from the lower section of the screen and click  on  Save  and then create your own custom fields as described above  You can then save    these and add more predefined fields     129      knowledgeTools    In order to delete a master data field that is already in use  click on the check box in  front of the name of the field that you want to delete in the    Currently Used Master Data    Fields    section and then click on the  Save  button at the bottom of the screen           NOTE  If you delete a master data field that is already in use  then all the corresponding    data on your server will be deleted        11 2  Specifications for Creating Processes and Documents    By using the Dossier Module  you have the option to generate documents on the basis of  templates and to then save these documents in a specific dossier  There are certain  specifications that should be taken into consideration with regard to the creation of  processes and the technical requirements for the creation of documents    e In order to generate documents  the template     ktoo s dot     must be installed    e The process templates can be used for the generation of processes    e The appearance of generated documents can be controlled with the help of the    layout templates that are part of process templates     11 2 1  Technical Requirements    In order to generate documents when using the Dossier Module  or to access generated  documents at a later stage  certain technical requirements mus
141. files from a period after the selected date  then click on the  radio button    On This Date or Later       If you want to search for files from a specific period  then select an end date for the  period by using the drop down lists at the bottom of the window    Click on  Search  to start the search  Please note that the search may take longer    depending on the quantity of data that must be searched     S knowledge Tools   Mozilla Firefox BAX    Datei Bearbeiten Ansicht Chronik Lesezeichen Extras Hilfe       Start Dossiers Knowledge Tutorials    Datarooms Reporting Templates Options    File Settings knowledgeTools  Datarooms Files Va Size Upload Upload by Creation    Ev Demo  Found data  1    logik pdf 239 KB 21 11 2007 Doe  John    YP Directory A  Y gt  Directory B  v amp  Tutorials       Files of your local system    Upload of a single file     Bulk upload             Fig   The display of the search results    The search results will be displayed on the right hand side of the screen   If you move the mouse pointer over the search results  then the directory of the file will    also be displayed in the    Properties    window  In order to open a file in the search results     106    E knowledgeTools    nV    click on the name of the file with the right mouse button and then select the    Open  option with the left mouse button    Your search criteria will be displayed in the quick search window and will remain in the  search mask so that you can modify the search terms wi
142. formation on the editing of trees is available further on in the User   s    Manual        3 2  Making knowledgeTools Accessible to Other Users   Publishing          NOTE  knowledgeTools are saved on the server in two versions  in a so called structure  editor version and in a published version  When knowledgeTools are created for the first  time or edited  these changes are at first only visible in the structure editor version  In  order to make the knowledgeTool accessible to other users  the structure editor version  must be published     Please note that you can only publish knowledgeTools if you have the    Tree Admin    access right        Open your web browser  we recommend that you use Internet Explorer     2  Enter the address of your LOGOS server and press the    Enter    key  the address  is     http   your_server_name knowledgetools dms       Login with your login information    4  Click on the  Edit  button next to the name of the knowledgeTool that you want to  publish  The knowledgeTools client will now open in structure editor mode   Open the    Navigation    menu and click on    Version of the Knowledge Tree       6  You can now publish the updated version of the knowledgeTool by clicking on     Publish Updated Version     marked in blue     7  Alternatively  you also have the option to publish a specific edited version  In the  main area of the window you will see all the versions  edited versions  of the  knowledgeTool  A link labelled    Publish This Versi
143. from the individual text modules during the  colour marking in normal mode  The document includes all the nodes that have been  marked either red or green and possess the respective text module  Texts that are    attached to nodes that have not been marked or marked as    Not Checked    are not    70            knowledgeTools    included in the document  The sequence in which the text modules are included in the  document is fixed   Therefore  it is important to visualize the way in which the text modules are arranged   There are three basic rules   1  The text modules of the parent nodes are inserted before the text modules of the  respective child nodes   2  The text modules of the child nodes are inserted from top to bottom in the  document   3  The text modules of a tree section are only inserted into the document after the  text modules of the previous tree section have been inserted   However  you have the option to change the order of the text modules  Further    information on this topic is available later on in the    Document Generation    chapter     7 1 2  Preparing the Knowledge Tree for Document Generation    Before it is possible to generate documents from a knowledgeTool  it is first necessary to  create the required text modules in the Structure Editor   1  Open the tree that you want to edit in editor mode  Please note that you must  possess write access to the tree   2  Make sure that the tree is assigned the application type     Document Generator      in 
144. ge into this et icon and a    chain  icon will appear next to the anchor icon    The entire section  as well as all the subsequent sections of the document up until the  next structure level of the document  will now be selected as sections that have the  option to be linked  Therefore  according to the example in the following illustration  the    entire section between    Heading 1 1    and    Heading 1 2    has the option to be linked     121    E knowledgeTools    E Demoscript     X       Cl search for page number Unlinked sections  w AL Pl et Or a  4 P  Demoscript  El Part I  Heading 1    15 fh   Lorem ipsum dolor sit amet  consetetur sadipscing elitr  sed  diam nonumy eirmod tempor invidunt ut labore et dolore  magna aliquyam erat  sed diam voluptua  At vero eos et  accusam et justo duo dolores et ea rebum     20 fh    Stet clita kasd gubergren  no sea takimata sanctus est Lorem  ipsum dolor sit amet     24 gt  fh   At vero eos et accusam et justo duo dolores et ea rebum  Stet  clita kasd gubergren  no sea takimata sanctus est Lorem  ipsum dolor sit amet     Part II  Part III                                  Fig   A document with assigned section markings    Sections that have been marked in this way  can also be further subdivided by using the  anchor  In the example above  clicking once on the anchor above    Ut       would suffice to  mark the two sections     Lorem ipsum       and    Ut        as two separate sections that have  the option to be linked  The second s
145. geTools    2 13  Working With Processes    Processes are the central element of your work with LOGOS  Knowledge trees are  abstract and map all the conceivable steps of a process  However  a process is the  concrete record of which of these steps you  as the user  have edited and in which way   In this way it is possible to save your work for editing at a later stage or for archiving  In    the legal field  the user can thus separately edit and save the cases of different clients           NOTE  Please note that the methods that are described in this chapter only apply if the  Dossier Module is not installed on your server   If the Dossier Module is installed on your server  then the methods that are described in    the chapter on    The Dossier Module    apply when working with processes        A  saveable  process is created when you   e assign a colour marking in a tree or    e attach a note to the node of a tree           NOTE  Generally each user always has access to the processes that they have saved   However  if the Dossier Module is being used  then processes can also be activated for    other users        In general  each process is automatically saved as soon as you assign a colour to a node  or attach a note to a node  However  we do recommend that you save and manage your    processes so that they are easier to find when you require them again     2 13 1  Creating New Processes    It is possible to save each and every edited version of a knowledge tree  colour ma
146. ght mouse button and select the    Link     option from the shortcut menu that appears  The file is now linked    A file can also be linked to more than one node  In order to do so  simply select another    node and repeat the steps described above     110         knowledgeTools    9 4 5  Deleting Links Between Files and Nodes    You can always delete the links between files in the sidebar and nodes at a later stage  In  order to do so  click on the corresponding file with the right mouse button and select the     Unlink    option from the shortcut menu    Please note that the deletion of the link only refers to the link between the files and the  respective selected node of the tree  If the file is linked to other nodes of the tree and  you want to delete all the links  then you have to delete the link for each node  individually    You can also display the nodes that the file is linked to  In order to do so  click on the file  with the right mouse button and select the option    List of Linked Nodes    from the  Shortcut menu  The list will now be displayed in a new window  You can quickly access  the individual nodes in the list by clicking on the title of the node in the selection window   In order to delete all the links to all the nodes  access the nodes in the list one after    another and delete the link to the file as described     9 4 6  Searching in Files    You can search for filenames and full text in the files that are displayed in the sidebar  As  the files tha
147. grate not  only input fields  but also master data fields into your text modules  These  as well as the  input fields  function as placeholders in the text module for the contents that are later  dynamically added  In this way  you can  for example  insert the name of a contact from  a file into a text module  In this case  the name that is entered under    Contact    in the file  will be entered in the placeholder when the document is created  The method for    integrating master data fields is the same as the method for integrating input fields     145       E knowledgeTools    11 9 6  Using the Sidebar    In normal mode  the document fields that exist for a node are displayed in a sidebar on  the right hand side of the screen as soon as the fields are activated by assigning the  corresponding colour markings  see figure     The sidebar opens automatically as soon as the corresponding colour marking has been  set  Of course  it is also possible to open the sidebar yourself by clicking on the tab on  the left hand side of the sidebar    The users can now enter their data in the corresponding fields and confirm the entries by  clicking on the  Save  button    Depending on how the nodes of the tree are associated with one another  it is also  possible that a parent node can automatically be marked as    True    or    False    as a result  of the marking of a child node  If this node also has input fields of its own  then these  input fields are also displayed in the sidebar wi
148. h the right mouse button   2  Select the    Rename    option from the shortcut menu with the left mouse button     3  Enter the new filename and click on the  OK  button     In order to delete a file  click on the file that you want to delete with the right mouse    button and select the    Delete    option from the shortcut menu by clicking on it with the    99      knowledgeTools    left mouse button  You will now be asked whether you want to delete the file  Confirm    the deletion of the file by clicking on  Delete  or cancel deletion by clicking on  Cancel      You have the option to delete all the files in a dataroom at once  In order to do so  select  the corresponding dataroom with the mouse  open the    Settings    menu and then select    the    Delete All Files    option     9 2 5  Deleting Directories    In order to delete a directory with all of the files and possible subdirectories that it  contains  proceed as follows    1  Select the directory that you want to delete by clicking on it with the mouse    2  Open the    File    menu and select the option     Delete recursive       3  Confirm your selection by clicking on the  Delete  button in the dialog box that  appears and the task window will open  In this window  the deletion of the  directory will be displayed as a new task that is to be executed  Please click on  the  gt  icon to start the delete process  If you want to cancel the delete process   then please click on the M icon    4  After the successful d
149. he    Ctrl    key on your keyboard pressed and scroll the mouse  scroll wheel upwards  the tree is reduced in size  If you scroll the mouse scroll wheel    downwards when the    Ctrl    key is pressed  the tree is enlarged     2 6  Additional Viewing Options    You also have the option to customize the appearance of the user interface according to    your requirements     2 6 1  Changing the User Interface Language    LOGOS is available both in English and in German  Users have the option to switch  between the English and German language versions of the user interface during    operation by clicking on    EN    or    DE    at the top right hand corner of the screen  You will    21      knowledgeTools    then be prompted to confirm your selection in a pop up window  Click on the  Accept   button to do so  The knowledgeTools client will be reloaded and the selected user  interface language will be used    Please note that by changing the user interface language  you are only doing so at your  own personal workstation  Please also note that changing the user interface language  only affects the actual user interface of LOGOS and not the language of the displayed    knowledgeTools           NOTE  Please note that when the language of the user interface is changed  the client is    reloaded and any data that has not been saved at the time will be lost        2 6 2  Displaying the Current Editor of a knowledgeTool    The user has the option to display the users that are online and
150. he    Edit    menu in the menu bar     3  Click on    Insert     Alternatively  you can click on the    icon in the toolbar     5 15 2  Inserting a Detached or Extracted Node    1  Click on the node in the tree structure where you want the detached or extracted  node to be inserted   Open the    Navigation    menu     Click on    Recycle Bin    and the    Recycle Bin    window will open  Alternatively  you    can click on the   icon in the toolbar    4  Click on the  Search  button in the    Recycle Bin    window  You will now see a list  of all the nodes that exist in the database and are not connected to the tree  structure    5  Select the node that you want to insert in the tree structure from the list by  clicking on it with the mouse  You may select more than one node    6  Click on the  Insert  button     5 16  Importing Nodes from Other KnowledgeTools    The user also has the option to import nodes or entire tree sections from an existing  knowledgeTool to the knowledgeTool that they are currently editing  The condition for  this is that     e both tools  source and target  are in the same LOGOS server system    57      knowledgeTools    the user has read and write access rights  structure editor rights  to both the    tools     Proceed as follows if you want to import one or more nodes from another knowledgeTool     1   2     OoOo aS    10     5 17     Open the knowledgeTool that you want to import from in structure editor mode   Navigate to the node that you want to
151. he dataroom must be imported before the knowledgeTool   whereby    datarooms must again be imported before scripts        Click on the    Options    tab   Please then click on    Import Product File      Click on the  Browse  button in the window that opens and select the directory  where the product file that you want to import is saved  Select the corresponding  file by clicking on it with the mouse and then please click on the  Open  button    4  Please then click on the  Upload  button   The task window will open after the successful upload of the product file  In this  window  the import of the product file will be displayed as a new task that is to be  executed  Please click on the  gt  icon to start the import process  If you want to    delete the import task  then please click on the T icon     41                4 2        knowledgeTools    After the successful import  the message     Completed Successfully     will be  displayed in the task window  Click on the icon to remove the successfully  completed task from the task window    Determine the users that may access the knowledgeTool that has just been    imported in the user database     Data Exchange  Importing knowledgeTools from Lexogram    Lexogram is an older Windows program for creating knowledgeTools  The user has the    option to import knowledgeTools that have been created with Lexogram to the LOGOS    server  Lexogram files can be recognized by the    KTD    filename extension           NOTE  You must pos
152. heading  but no text will    be displayed        Texts may contain links to laws  which will then be highlighted in blue  If you click on a    link to a law  then it will be displayed in full text in a new window     10 6 2  Creating Links Between Nodes and Text Sections    In order to display and link documents  the documents must first be imported to the  LOGOS server   The linking of texts and nodes in a tree occurs in three steps      select which of the imported documents the tree should access     define the sections in the individual documents that you want to link to nodes      finish by linking the sections to the nodes of the tree           NOTE  You can also determine that a tree can access more than one document        Open the tree in structure editor mode   2  Open the    Navigation    menu and click on the option labelled     Open Technical Tree Properties      Scroll down to    Scripts and file shares      4  Click on the lower selection list labelled    Select scripts      All of the available documents will now be displayed in the list  Select one or more  documents by clicking on them once with the left mouse button   6  Click on the  Save  button  The    Technical Tree Properties    window will close and  a dialog box will appear  Click on the  Reload  button in the dialog box  The  sidebar will now appear on the right hand side of the screen with the datarooms  that you have selected   If you have selected several documents  then the names of the document
153. hen you restore the backup  any existing data on the server will    be overwritten        In order to restore a backup  proceed as follows     1     Start the LOGOS server console by opening the Windows Start menu and then  selecting    LOGOS Server Console    in the    LOGOS    program group    The status bar of the server console will display whether the LOGOS server is  running  If it is running  the message     Server is running    will be displayed    If the server is running  then please stop the server  In order to do so  open the     File    menu and select the    Start   Stop Server    option    Open the    Backup    menu in the server console and select the    Restore from  Backup    option    In the window that now opens  please select the directory in which a previously  created backup has been saved and then click on the  OK  button to confirm your  selection    You will now be asked whether you want to restore the backup  Confirm this  action by clicking on the  Start  button  The restoring of the backup will then start  immediately    You will receive a corresponding message once the process has been completed     Click on the  Close  button to close the message     Please note that restoring the backup will have a noticeable effect on the performance of    the server     203         knowledgeTools    18 2  The LOGOS Web Console    Contrary to the LOGOS server console  the LOGOS web console can be accessed in a  browser via the Internet  Therefore  it is not ne
154. hortlist    input field  in which  the user has the option to    create    a shortlist with specified values  In this case  the subsequent user can select a    value from a list of predefined values  instead of entering a value     74    E3 knowledgeTools    Available fields         m Name    Input field 1   Type    Character string     Condition    Checked    a    t m Mame  inputfield 2 Type    Shortlist Condition    Checked    Aa    Accept    Fig   The    Input Fields    dialog box for the creation of a Shortlist       In order to create this type of shortlist  proceed as follows     1     2  3   A    Enter a field name in the input field labelled    Label       Select the option    Shortlist    under    Type       Select when the field should be visible under    Conditions       A blue wrench icon will now appear on the right hand side  Click on the icon and a  new window will open    The values of the shortlist can be entered in this new window  Enter the first value  in the input field on the left  next to the  OK  button    Click on  OK  and the value will be displayed in the field below    Enter the next value in the upper field and click on  OK  again    In order to change the order of the values in the list  click on a value once with  the left mouse button and it will be selected  By using the arrow keys on the  keyboard  you can now move the value up or down in the list    In order to delete a value from the list  select the required value  as described  above  by 
155. ht hand side of the screen in which all the calculation fields  that are contained in the tree will be displayed  please refer to the next illustration     The line that is highlighted in blue always displays the ID and title of the node that  contains the calculation fields that are listed below it  In order to display the  corresponding node in the tree  click on the blue arrow on the left of the node title    The name of the field  e g  A1  is displayed next to the input field    If the calculation field is used to output a calculation result  then the formula will be  displayed in grey below the field  The background colour of the field is also grey  It is not  possible to manually enter any values in such a field  the field is only used to output  calculation results    If a description has been entered for the field  then it will be displayed below the field in    a black font     166    E knowledgeTools    Calculation           Node xi     E    First field description    E TS    Second field description      Node  4     m      Fig   The sidebar with calculation fields in normal mode    If multiple calculation fields have been created at a node  then these are displayed  separated by a horizontal black line    Nodes in a knowledge tree that contain one or more calculation fields are indicated by  the presence of the I icon  The user can click on the icon in the node in order to quickly  access these input fields  The node title that belongs to the input fields will be h
156. ick on  Search      6  When the search results appear  click on the name of the corresponding user     44             7     10     4 6       knowledgeTools    You will now see all the access rights of the selected user  Click on the white  arrow next to    Access Rights Scripts       In the    Access Rights Scripts    section  you will now see a list of all the available  scripts on the system  including the name of the newly imported knowledgeTool   You will see check boxes labelled    Read    and    Edit    next to the names of the  Scripts    Click on the check box in the column labelled    Read    if the selected user is only to  be granted read access to the script  click on the check box in the column labelled     Edit    if you want the user to also be able to edit the script     Finish by clicking on the  Save  button to apply the changes     Data Exchange  Exporting a Script to a File    Scripts can be exported to a product file in the same way as knowledgeTools and passed    on in this form           NOTE     You must possess the    Tree Admin    administrative access right in order to be able    to perform this task        Click on the    Options    tab    Please then click on    Manage Scripts       All the scripts that exist on the server will now be displayed in a list  You have the  option to export one or more scripts  Select the script that you want to export by  clicking on the check box in front of the name of the corresponding script  If you  want to expor
157. ick on the  Upload  button    The task window will open after the successful upload of the file    In this window  the import of the product file will be displayed as a new task that  is to be executed  Please click on the P icon to start the import process  If you  want to delete the import task  then please click on the    icon    6  After the successful import  the message     Completed Successfully     will be  displayed in the task window  Click on the   f icon to remove the successfully  completed task from the task window    7  Determine the users that may access the script that has just been imported in the    user database  see below      4 5  Activating an Imported or Newly Created Script          NOTE  When a script is first imported it is not visible to any user  Therefore the users  that are to be granted access to this new knowledgeTool must first be activated for the  script in the user administration    It is only possible to activate a script for users if you possess the    User Admin    access    right        Open your web browser  we recommend that you use Internet Explorer     2  Enter the address of your LOGOS server and press the    Enter    key  the address  is     http   your_server_name knowledgetools dms       Login with your login information    4  Click on the    Users    tab   Enter the first name  surname or e mail address of the user that you want to  grant access to the newly imported knowledgeTool in the field labelled    Search  for    and cl
158. ideo will be restored    If the author of the tutorial has set markers  then these will be displayed below the  video  You have the option to move directly to a position in the tutorial that has been    specified by the author  by clicking on the title of the marker     During the playback of the video  the majority of the functions in the client are disabled   i e  you cannot open menus  assign colour markings to nodes  etc  If you pause the video  by clicking on the  u  button  then the functions will be reactivated  Please note that any  entries  e g  colour markings  that are made when the video is paused  will be deleted as  soon as the playback of the video resumes    You can end the tutorial at any time by clicking on the   x   button at the top right hand  corner of the video player window  If you end the tutorial  then the functions of the client    are reactivated     175       knowledgeTools    15  User Administration    You can create  edit and delete users and user groups  as well as edit the administrative    and content related rights of existing users and user groups in the user administration           NOTE  In order to create users or edit existing users  you must possess the    User  Admin    user administration right  If this is the case  then the    Users    tab will be    displayed at the top of your screen  Click on this tab to open the user administration        15 1  Creating New Users    Click on the  New User  button at the bottom of the screen    2
159. ighlighted    in orange in the sidebar     Enter the corresponding numerical values for your working situation in the input fields in  the sidebar  The calculations will be performed as soon as you click on the  Save  button  in the top right hand corner of the sidebar  At the same time  the entered numerical    values and the calculation results will be saved as a process           NOTE  If you are using the Dossier Module and working without a process template  then  when you click on the  Save  button you will be asked to state the name that you want  to save the process under and the dossier that you want to save it in  please refer to  chapter 11 8 2         13 4  Exporting Entered Values and Calculation Results    The numerical values that are entered in the fields  as well as the calculation results  are  Saved as a process and can then always be accessed again  In addition  numerical values  and calculation results can be exported as an MS Excel file  In order to do so  open the     Process    menu and select the    Export Process Data    option  In the dialog box that    opens  select whether you want to open the XLS file or save it to your local hard drive     167       E knowledgeTools          NOTE  The result of colour markings that have been assigned within a process and the  entered and calculated numerical values are displayed in two separate worksheets in the  MS Excel file        168       E knowledgeTools    14  The Tutorial Module    If the Tutorial Module
160. ill be displayed in a yellow box  The following information will be  displayed   e how often the node has been marked as    True    or    False    by users  e how often the node has been automatically marked as    True    or    False    by the  system on the basis of the logical colour marking system  e how often the node has been marked as    True    or    False    altogether  in the line  labelled    Total Markings      e how many processes have been analysed altogether  e the difference between the total number of processes of the node and markings    on the node    If you click on the bar  then the    Process Analysis    window will open  you can search for  specific processes in this window  In this case  the search is only performed in the  respective node    By using the search options  you can search for processes in which the node has been  automatically or manually set as    True    or    False       The search results display the name of the corresponding process  the user name of the  user that created the process  as well as the date that it was created on  If you click on    the name of a process in the search results  the process will open     17 3  Graphical Process Analysis and Risk Analysis    knowledgeTools that have been assigned the application type     Risk Analysis     have a  special form of the graphical process analysis at their disposal    This analysis can be accessed by clicking on the    Reporting    tab in the normal way and  then clicking on   
161. inal New Node Above a Child Node    ry    Click on the node that you want to attach a new node above     A    Open the    Edit    menu in the menu bar   3  Click on    Create New Node Above     This function is also available in the shortcut  menu     4  A new  empty node will now be created above the selected node     Ul    Open the    Properties    window   6  Enter the properties of the new node  node title  alternative text and  where    applicable  colour  in the    Properties    window and then save them     5 9  Creating an Original New Node Behind a Node    With the help of this function  you have the option to create a new node between two  nodes  behind the first node    1  Click on the node behind which you want to insert a new node     2  Open the    Edit    menu in the menu bar     53    5 10        knowledgeTools    Click on    Insert New Node Behind     Alternatively you can also use the    icon in  the toolbar  This function is also available in the shortcut menu    A new  empty node will now be inserted behind the node in question    Open the    Properties    window    Enter the properties of the new node  node title  alternative text and  where  applicable  colour  in the    Properties    window and then save them    If necessary  change the logical association of the new node to the node s  behind    it and before it     Creating an Original New Node Before a Node    With the help of this function  you have the option to create a new node between two    nod
162. ing Court    Start by clicking on the    A amp D    tab at the top of the screen    Please then click on the selection list labelled    Please Select Court    and select a  court form the list    Click on the  New Decision  button at the bottom of the screen    Enter the file number of the decision in the corresponding input field of the  window that appears    Enter the date of the decision in the input field labelled    Date of Decision       Click on the  Save  button and an input mask will open for the contents of the  decision    All the possible contents of the decision are listed in blue bars      Keywords     Norms     Headnotes     Facts of the Case     Reasons for the Decision     Sources     Lower Higher Instance   The  Edit  button is displayed next to the description of each category  Click on  the button in order to enter the content of the corresponding category    An editing window will open and the functions will vary depending on the type of  content that you want to enter    e Keywords   Start by clicking on the button labelled  Add New Keyword  in  the window  Enter the keyword in the input field that appears  In order to  add another keyword  click on the button labelled  Add New Keyword   again and enter the new keyword in the next input field  You can also  remove individual keywords by clicking on the  Remove  button under the  corresponding keyword  Finish by clicking on the  Save  button to save    your entries     88       8 3 3     1  2  3   4    8
163. ing MS Word Documents as Scripts          NOTE  You must possess the    Tree Admin    administrative access right in order to be able    to perform this task        1  Click on the    Options    tab    2  Please then click on    Import MS Word Document       3  Enter a name for the document that you want to import in the upper input field of  the window that opens  The document will be displayed with this name after being  imported as a script    4  Next  click on the  Browse  button and select the directory where the MS Word  document that you want import is saved  Select the document by clicking on it  with the mouse and then click on the  Open  button    5  Please then click on the  Upload  button    6  The task window will open after the successful upload of the file    In this window  the import of the document will be displayed as a new task that is  to be executed  Please click on the P icon to start the import process  If you want  to delete the import task  then please click on the M icon    7  After the successful import  the message     Completed Successfully     will be  displayed in the task window  Please then click on the icon to remove the  successfully completed task from the task window    Documents that are imported as scripts are initially not visible to any users  The access  of the users to the new script must first be activated  This process is described further on    in the User   s Manual in the chapter titled     Manage Access to Scripts        113  
164. ingilla sed  lobortis pharetra  sapien          Quisque nunc libero  lobortis at  varius vel  eleifend at  nisi   Vivamus ornare molestie nulla  Aliquam tempus consectetuer  purus  Phasellus sed magna  Suspendisse potenti  Etiam in est  quis nulla scelerisque molestie  Ut risus  Integer semper  dui sit  amet varius feugiat  eros massa vehicula elit  sed volutpat felis  dolor et velit  Donec nonummy euismod lectus  Nunc laoreet  nibh vulputate nulla  Sed vehicula ante     Fig   The dynamically created document in the sidebar    A blue arrow is displayed above every text module  If you touch this arrow with the  mouse  then the node that the text module belongs to is displayed  The display occurs in  the following form   Node ID  Node Title   If you click on the arrow  then the    corresponding node is accessed on the left in the knowledge tree           NOTE  Changes that are made to text modules are saved in the updated process and can  therefore be accessed at any time  However  the changes do not have an effect on the    original text modules of the knowledge tree        Moving Text Blocks   Text blocks can be moved up or down by one position within the document   In order to do so  select the text block that you want to move by clicking on it with the  r wA    mouse  the text block will then be marked in grey  and then click on the A o icons to    move the text block up or down     148          knowledgeTools    Editing Text Modules    Select the text module that you want 
165. inoise a a a E A r 174   15  User Administration          ss                                            su2su5 225u20u20u206 176   ISl Creating New USE Siaveccuanesctin seauecsnnorcnbaensvoniwedecontaanayenimadotentaacewacinednient  176   15 2  Searching for Existing USerS            ssssssssssssssssssssnesnsnsnnesrnnsssnnssrsnssennesenne 177   15  Deleting EXIStINg USGFS rrrrrirairisni errn nEri EAEE Eei 177   15 4  Creating New User GrOUDS cscernttcrtsetonestcenstoenasnnensbanreenetantonatinernenesonnneete 177   15 5  Searching for Existing User Groups          sssssssssssssssssnssssnnesnnnssnsnesnsnesnesenne 178   15 6  Deleting Existing User Groups          ssssssssssssssssssssnessnnsssnnesnnnesnsnesnsnennenenne 178   LG  Access Rights Syste iisvccinisseciveswscdcestinrnvssisscnsewinerscnessnernesuseedsewnseencseews 179   lols GODI ACCESS  Ri Gis irnia erei 179   erd le BUDEIVISO  eaa E E E E a 179      knowledgeTools    LOLA ls  tlc  6  ogee eet et nr te arn ne ee ee ee 179  TO uss     WICWER secoseuacac A vereccececeseantnsee cesenataceces 180  16 2  Administrative Access Rights          ccccccc cece cece eeeeeeeeeee eee e eee e ee eeeeeeeaaaaanes 180  16 2 1  User Management ACMiN          cccccceccctscceeesenneeeeeeeessceeeessnnnannneeneesnegs 180  EGe 222 Tord PCO orcad cece oo eee eee stent iee ede ee eee ete ce eetee cise  180  Too GCS PGW es cerca tes cerca aedeatens pee A ncaa ncneecoe ere EA AT 180  16 2 4  Laws and Decisions ACMIN       ccccccccctceccceetdecess
166. isor   If the Tutorial Module is installed  then users and or user groups that possess this access  right can view tutorials if they also possess read access to the trees that are linked to the  tutorial    Manager   If the Tutorial Module is installed  then users and or user groups that possess this access  right can view tutorials if they also possess read access to the trees that are linked to the  tutorial    Viewer   If the Tutorial Module is installed  then users and or user groups that possess this access  right can view tutorials if they also possess read access to the trees that are linked to the    tutorial     16 5  Tabular Summary    The following tables describe the access rights that the users must possess in order to  access specific functions  Certain functions are only available if the corresponding licence    is installed on your server  The required licences are listed separately     Trees         Minimum Requirement  Create New Trees  Publish Trees Tree Admin   Tree Right  Write     Import Trees Tree Admin    Delete Trees Tree Admin   Tree Right  Write     Tree Right  Read   Edit Structure Supervisor   Tree Right  Write     Edit Additional Information Manager   Tree Right  Write   Change Technical Tree Properties Supervisor   Tree Right  Write     Tree Admin   Tree Right  Write   Export Trees as    KIP    Files Tree Admin    Export Trees as    KTD    Files Tree Admin  Execute Field Upgrades Tree Admin   Tree Right  Write        184       E knowledgeTools  
167. isplayed as a figure under the  corresponding lines    A vertical grey bar displays the average expected value that has been calculated from the    expected values of the individual processes     17 4  The Raw Data Analysis    The raw data analysis is another variation of the process analysis  This analysis displays  not only the tree nodes that have been marked as  True  or  False  within the individual    processes  but also the data that has been entered into the input fields of the trees           NOTE  Only the data of processes that have been created in the currently published  version of the tree is displayed  The data of processes that have been created in older    versions of the tree is not displayed        The analysis is displayed in a table    e the    Process    column displays the name of the process into which the data was  entered   e the    User    column displays the name of the user that created the process   e the    Node Title    column displays the title of the node  where a colour marking has  been assigned or an input field has been completed   e the    Node ID    column displays the unique ID of the node  where a colour marking  has been assigned or an input field has been completed   e the    Path    column displays the unique path of the node  where a colour marking  has been assigned or an input field has been completed   e the    Marking    column displays whether the node has been marked within the  process as    True    or    False     this ana
168. isting Scripts in Trees       cc cccccccsccceeseesceceeeneeeeceeeesaeeneeccenes 118  10 6  Links Between Nodes and Text SectionS         sssssssssrssrrsrrnrenrrnrenrenrrsresrenn 118      knowledgeTools    10 6 1  8     0  1a  4  al fo   4 8  nee ee ee ee ee ee eee 119  10 6 2  Creating Links Between Nodes and Text Sections          ccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 120  10 6 3  Deleting Links Between Nodes and Text SECtIONS         ccccceeeeeseeeeeeeeeees 123  10 64  Seared IN TOXTS ssrisirissriniei onni A 124  10 6 5  Exporting Scripts as    PDF    and    RTF    FileS         ssssssssssnnnnnnsnnnnsrrnrsrenns 125  TOG G  Poeno o PES onari AA EEEE EN 126  10 7  Managing Access to SCHDUS csiricssraiticiadsitirseeni tendren use ERNER A R EE ADENN nnna 126  11  The Dossier Module       s  sssss222                    s                                      5 128  11 1  Configuring Dossier Administration            ssssssssssrssrsnsnrsrrnrsrrnnsrenrerrnrenrnns 128  11 2  Specifications for Creating Processes and Documents          ssssssssssrsrenrsrenn 130  11 2 1  Technical Requirements         ssssssssssssssssnssennsssnnessnnssnnnenennsnesnssennesenn 130  11 3  Creating Layout TemplateS           ssssssssssssssssssssrsssssnnesrnnesnnsnesnsnennenennesrnne 131  11 4  Creating Process Template           sssssssssssnssssnssnsnssnssrnnesennessnnesnsnesnnnesenne 133  11 5  Editing Existing Process TemplateS          sssssnssssssssssnnsssnnssnsnrsnsnrsnsseenesenne 134  11 6  Deleting Existing Proce
169. it     Configuring the Technical Tree Properties    Knowledge trees have certain technical properties that are configured by the user     These technical properties influence the appearance of the tree in the knowledgeTool    client  the type of additional information that is displayed in the client and the presence    of certain functions  e g  the discussion forum      After creating a new tree  you should first configure the technical tree properties  Open    the    Navigation    menu and click on the    Open Technical Tree Properties    option     The    Technical Tree Properties    window will open           NOTE  It is always possible to change the technical properties of the tree  with the    exception of the technical tree name  at a later stage        35                knowledgeTools    The following options are available when configuring the technical tree properties     Technical tree properties    Please set the technical properties of the tree here  You can always change these settings at a later stage     knowledge tree  demo    Title  demo      Short description    Description  Edit   0 characters                      Application type     No document           Optional features   x  Send comments as e mails to        x  knowledgeTools logic     _  Expected values   currency m    X  Discussion forum   Send articles as e mails to   E      X  Zoom Out  fl Weight  LI Suppress window  Delete process nodes    L  Suppress display of computed data    Input fields   _  
170. it amet            t vero eos et accusam et justo duo dolores et ea rebum  Stet  clita kasd gubergren  no sea takimata sanctus est Lorem ipsum  dolor sit amet           Fig   The dynamically created document in the sidebar    A blue arrow is displayed above every text module  If you touch this arrow with the  mouse pointer  then the node that the text module belongs to is displayed  The display  occurs in the following form   Node ID  Node Title   If you click on the arrow  then the    corresponding node is accessed on the left in the knowledge tree     Moving Text Modules   Text modules can be moved up or down by one position within the document    In order to do so  select the text module that you want to move by clicking on it with the  mouse  the text module will then be marked in grey  and then click on    rm    the or     icons to move the text block up or down     Editing Text Modules    Select the text module that you want to edit by clicking on it once with the mouse and    then click on the Ei icon  An editing window will open  Edit the text as required and then  click on the  Save  to apply your changes  Please note that these changes will only have  an effect on the text module in the document draft in the sidebar  The original text of the  text module in the knowledge tree will remain unchanged     Text modules that have been edited in this way will be marked accordingly  The note       adapted    will be displayed on the right of the    icon on the first line of
171. it existing decisions    e delete existing decisions    16 2 5  Forum Admin    Users that possess this access right can delete existing forum contributions in the    discussion forums of all trees     16 3  Tree Related Access Rights    These access rights apply for the entire tree  but not for the entire server  i e  the access  rights to trees must be determined individually for each user and or user group     The access rights to trees are classified in three levels     16 3 1  Read Access    The tree in question can only be opened for reading  It is possible to create processes in  the tree  in so far as the corresponding global access rights are available  see above   In    addition  users with this authorization level are unable to change the tree structure and    181      knowledgeTools    the additional texts  or to create links between the contents of files and the script    sidebar     16 3 2  Edit Access    The tree in question can be opened for reading  i e  in normal mode  and can also be  opened for editing  i e  in editor mode    The editing rights can also be additionally tiered by combining the global access rights        Supervisor    and    Manager     with the    Edit    access right for the individual tree     Users that possess the    Supervisor    global access right  as well as the right to edit a tree   are able to perform the following actions in the tree    e edit the tree structure   e edit the technical tree properties   e create  edit and delete 
172. law in the Legal Database    Click on the    plus    sign to open the hierarchy  Elements that have a text will be  highlighted in orange when you move over them with the mouse pointer  Click on these  elements to display the corresponding text on the right hand side of the screen    If the Legal Database contains earlier versions of the law that were valid in the past  then  there will be a button labelled  Other Versions  displayed under the text of the law  By  clicking on this button  the versions that were previously applicable  as well as the  corresponding period when the earlier versions were valid  will be displayed    The user can search the Legal Database for specific individual regulations within the  currently displayed law    The    Direct Selection    input field is displayed at the top right hand corner of the screen   Enter the regulation that you want to search for in the input field and confirm the entry  by clicking on the  OK  button  The search result will then be displayed in the same    window     8 1 2  Accessing Laws in a knowledgeTool    Click on the corresponding entry in order to view a law that is listed in the    Library     window  The currently open tree will now be minimized and the law will be displayed     Click on the minimized display of the tree to return to the knowledge tree     85       E knowledgeTools    8 2  Viewing Decisions    The user has the option to access the decisions that are contained in the Legal Database    either direc
173. left hand side of the window with the mouse  3  Click on the  Delete Directory  button    33         knowledgeTools    4  A new window will open and you will be prompted to confirm the deletion  Confirm    deletion by clicking on the  OK  button with the mouse     2 13 10  Moving a Process    Open the    Process    menu and select the    Manage Processes    option    2  Select the process that you want to move from the list that appears by clicking on  it with the mouse  The name of the selected process is now displayed in the input  field labelled    Process       Click on the  Move  button    4  A new window will appear and you will be prompted to select the folder that you  want to move the new process to    5  Select the new folder and confirm the move by clicking on the  OK  button in the    next window     2 13 11 Notes    The user also has the option to attach individual notes to each and every node of a tree  and to save them in a process     1    In order to create a new note  select the    Show Note Window    option from the    View       menu or click on the icon in the toolbar  Enter the text of the note in the new window  that opens and click on the  Save  button to save the note  If  at this point in time  you  have not yet worked in a process  then a new process will automatically be created when  you save the note    If there is a note attached to a node  then this will be indicated by the presence of this     yellow icon at the bottom right hand corner of the
174. lete the file  Click on   Cancel  if you do not want to delete the file    11 12  Dossier Notes    Besides processes and files  you also have the option to create and save text based    notes      n dossiers  The same conditions apply for these notes as for processes and files     i e  notes are initially private and are only visible to the user that created the note     However  notes can also be activated for all users     11 12     1  Creating New Notes    Notes are always part of a dossier  Therefore  before creating a note  it is first necessary    to select the dossier that you want the note to be assigned to     1     2  3  4   5    Click on the    Dossiers    tab    Click on  Open Dossiers     Click on the dossier that you want to add the note to    Click on the  New Note  button at the bottom of the screen    In the    Note    window that opens  enter a name for the note  followed by the text  of the note below it     Finish by clicking on  Save      152      knowledgeTools    Create note    Name  Meeting    Text     This i   a note    Save Cancel       Fig   The    Note    window    11 12 2  Opening and Editing Existing Notes    Notes in dossiers are indicated by presence of the El icon  Click on the name of a note to    open it  You can change the name and content of a note at any time by editing the text    that is displayed in the two input fields  Click on the  Save  button to apply your    changes     11 12 3  Activating Notes    While dossiers are generally ac
175. lities of occurrence at    child nodes if a value has already been set at the parent node        In order to reset an entry that has been made  please click on the   icon  The node will  then be reset to a probability of occurrence between 0  and 100   Alternatively  you  also have the option to click on the node with the right mouse button and select the     Not Checked    option from the shortcut menu    In order to close the input window for probabilities of occurrence  simply click on    the B icon again     157       E knowledgeTools    12 3  Using Expected Values    The user not only has the option to enter and calculate the probability of occurrence at  the node  but also values and expected values   i e   an event that is illustrated in a  particular node can represent a specific  monetary  value and the probability of  occurrence of the event can then be used as a basis to calculate the probability with  which a particular value can actually be realized    In order to use this function  the    Expected Values    option must be activated in the  technical tree properties and you must also select the currency in which you would like to  enter and have the expected values calculated in  You have the option to choose between  the euro  the US dollar and the pound sterling    In order to enter a value at a node  open the input window for entering the probability of  occurrence by clicking on the    icon    Next  click on the   icon at the bottom left hand corner of the wi
176. load by Creation   in  logik  pdf 239 KB 21 11 2007 Doe  John    W Directory B Search for files  v amp  Tutorials   Search key      Search in  Filenames  Filecontents  Keywords  Directory  Day m  Month     Year  a      exactly on this day    created    O before this day    uploaded     on this day or later O as keyword    until month    Files of your local system    Upload of a single file     Bulk upload             Fig   The    Search For Files    search mask    If you want to search for a term  not a date   then enter the term in the field labelled     Search Term     In the default version  this term is used for searching filenames  file  contents and keywords  You have the option to narrow the search by deselecting the    individual options in the corresponding check boxes     105       E knowledgeTools    If you want to use the date search  then first select the required date by using the  drop down lists for the    Day        Month    and    Year       In the default version  the search is performed for all files that were created on the  specific date    By using the    Upload    and or    Keyword    radio buttons  you also have the option to  search for files that were uploaded to the server on a specific date or that have been  assigned the date as a keyword    If  instead of searching for files on a specific date  you want to search for files from a  period before the selected date  then click on the radio button    Before This Date       If you want to search for 
177. lour markings    These markings are saved in a Process  They can be used to create documents and to    analyse statistics  Further information on processes is available below     In order to mark a node as    True    or    False     you must first click on it with the left mouse    button  The user now has several options     Click on the v    icon in the toolbar to mark the node as    True    or click on    the   icon to mark the node as    False     Click on this 2 icon in order to remove  the marking that has been assigned to a node    Alternatively  you can click once on the node with the right mouse button  The  Shortcut menu will open and you will be able to select one of the following option      True        False    or    Not Checked     by clicking on it once    As a further alternative  you can also open the    Process    menu in the main menu  and select the corresponding option from the menu    The final alternative is to assign the marking by using the keyboard  Press the    G     key for    True     resp  green   the    R    key for    False     resp  red  or the    U    key for     Not Checked        2 10  Locked Nodes    In order to avoid logical conflicts  nodes may be locked in certain cases and it will not be    possible to assign the logical colour marking to the nodes  These nodes are then coloured    blue and the logical colour marking options are disabled when the user clicks on such a    node     26      knowledgeTools    This form of locking occurs in
178. lysis does not differentiate between nodes  that have been set manually or automatically   If probabilities of occurrence have  been entered in the processes  then the corresponding values are displayed in  per cent    e The    Value  Currency     column displays the value that has been entered at the  node  and where applicable  the selected currency  for processes that have been  created in risk analysis trees   e The    Emin    column displays the minimum expected value for processes that have  been created in risk analysis trees   e The    Emax    column displays the maximum expected value for processes that have    been created in risk analysis trees    194         knowledgeTools    the    Field Name    column displays the name of the input field  if it exists  at the  node  if there are several input fields at a node  then these will each be displayed  in a new line   the    Value    column displays the content that has been entered into the previous  field    The analysis can also be downloaded as an    XLS    file  e g  for further processing in    Excel   In order to do so  click on the  Download Excel  button     17 5  The User Statistics    This analysis shows you which users have accessed trees and for what periods of time           NOTE  This analysis is only available on servers that have been pre configured    accordingly        The analysis is displayed in a table     the    User    column contains the user name   the    Start Date    column displays when the 
179. m requirements for the use of the Text Editor   e Installed Browser  Microsoft Internet Explorer version 6 or later  e Activated JavaScript    e Editorial Write Authorization          NOTE  When using a browser other than Microsoft Internet Explorer  the functions of the    Text Editor are only available to a limited extent        6 1  Opening the Text Editor    Open the tree that you want to edit in structure editor mode    2  Select the node to that you want to add the additional information to or that you  want to edit the existing additional information of    3  In the additional information window  every available text category  e g      Explanation    or    Text Module  True     will be represented by a tab  Click on the  required tab in order to select the text category that you want to edit    4  The       icon will be displayed at the top right hand corner of each tab  Click on the    icon to edit the text of the corresponding category     When a category is selected  the Text Editor will open  see next figure      62       E knowledgeTools         knowledgeTools   Mozilla Firefox BAX  Datei Bearbeiten Ansicht Chronik Lesezeichen Extras Hilfe       Editor    O B  M  o   ss u ey EE    Hello world    Path  body             Fig   The Text Editor    6 2  Creating New Texts in the Online Editor    Enter your text in the text input field under the toolbar   2  Save the text by clicking on the  Save  button  The text editor view will now close    and you will automatically 
180. mines the thickness of the borders of the table  if a value  of O is entered then the borders of the table are not visible    e Cell Spacing and Cell Padding determine the inner and outer cell margins of the  table   Once you have determined the properties of the table  you can insert the table into your    document by clicking on the  OK  button   6 9  Additional Text Editor Options    6 9 1  Deleting Existing Text With a Mouse Click    In order to entirely delete existing text  click on the  Delete Entire Text  button     6 9 2  Cancel Text Editing Without Saving the Text    Click on the  Cancel  button to leave the editor without saving any changes that may    have been made     67    E knowledgeTools    6 9 3  Using the Undo Function  By using the undo function  you can undo changes that have been made to your    kj    document  In order to do so  click on the icon     6 9 4  Using the Redo Function  By using the redo function  you can cancel changes that have been made to your    a    document using the undo function  In order to do so  click on the icon     6 9 5  Copying Contents to the Clipboard  In order to copy text to the clipboard  select the corresponding text with the mouse and    click on the icon     6 9 6  Inserting Copied Contents from the Clipboard   In order to copy text from the clipboard into your text  click on the position where you  want to paste the text in the text input window with your mouse  Click on the Fal icon to  paste the contents of the cli
181. n at the beginning of the line  Select    the line by clicking on it with the mouse and then click on the Ej icon to enter the  actual text   3  The text editor will now open on the left  Enter a text and click on  Save  to save  your entries   Please note that text modules that are added in this way are not linked to a node of the    knowledge tree     Deleting Text Modules    Select the text module that you want to delete by clicking on it with the mouse and then    click on the icon  Please note that the text module is only deleted from the document  draft in the sidebar  The original text module remains in the knowledge tree    If a text module has been deleted  then an empty line is displayed instead of the text  module with the    icon at the front of the line  The note    removed    will be displayed on    the right hand side of the icon     149       knowledgeTools    In order to recover the deleted text module  first click once on the corresponding line and      icon  The    Versions    window will now open on the left hand side     then click on the  Select one of the displayed versions of the text module by clicking on the button labelled   Use This Version      The text module will now again be displayed on the right hand side     Show Preview    Click on the lal icon to show the preview of the document without separated text modules    and icons in the text     11 10 2  Saving and Accessing Generated Documents in Dossiers    Once a document has been generated  yo
182. n conta acenecereuieetensunsteence sets sapere TEPEN ENTRATE 93  5 13  Creating the Instance of a Node or Tree Section         c ccc eeeeeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 55  Dale  Removing NOGDOS a vccecacsctd cnatgu tear en kn LENCE CEOE ON N Era 56  541  Detaching NOUES Acccccasccwatsasaas cogeesageanraenasnuieeonsonvacundnnaaenbspnseenemesuquaaess 56  Deda Ure NOUS cata ceca lev enue EREE eure ws Se EEEE bonnes eorgariccenecsteuees 56  Delt  CUCHAG INGO SS    cccccceacuaraisasea sinc sancguvasuiannnetencenne tina rE 57  5 15  Reinserting Previously Removed NOCES         cccceceee cece cece eee eeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeennees 57  5 15 1  Inserting a Cut Node           sssssssssssssssssssssssssnssronssnnnesnsnssnsnesnnnensnnesnnnne 57  5 15 2  Inserting a Detached or Extracted Node       ssssssesessnrrsnrnrsnensrrnrnrnrrrrrrnne 57  5 16  Importing Nodes from Other KnowledGeTOols           ccccccceeeeeeeeeseeeeeeeeeeennees 57  Te MNES  IN CGS conira E EAEE E 58  5 18  The Undo and REGO FUNCTIONS beicicciccsvterscsentdvecieniiseidanidetinnndedinandnedinnnceeds 59  5 19  Switching Between the Editor and Normal MOdES           ccccceeeeeeeeseeseeeeeeeeeaes 59  5 20  Deleting Knowledge Tre e S        cccccccccssenneeeereeeeseceessennnanneeeeeeesseeeeegennnaannees 59  521  Command RETEFENCE raran E E AE 60  Editing Additional Information With the Text EditOr          cccscccccceeeennnnnnes 62   6 1  Opening tne Text Edit emea Roe geo Ce arn ree nee ree eee 62  6 2  Creating New Texts in the Onli
183. n only users that possess this access right have  access to all the functions of the dataroom  All datarooms are displayed  regardless of  the access rights of the users to the individual knowledge trees linked to the datarooms   Only Tree Admins can   e export datarooms as product files   e download directories   e create new datarooms    e delete existing datarooms     Viewer   The    Datarooms    tab is not visible to users that possess this access right  If individual  datarooms are linked to trees and the user has read access to these trees as a    Viewer      then the user also has read access to the datarooms that are linked to the corresponding    tree in the tree view     16 4 2  Special Access Rights When Using the Dossier Module    Supervisor  If the Dossier Module is installed  then users and or user groups that possess this access  right can    e create  edit and delete dossiers   e create  edit and delete dossier contents  processes  files and notes    e create  edit and delete process and layout templates   Manager  If the Dossier Module is installed  then users and or user groups that possess this access  right can    e create  edit and delete dossiers    e create  edit and delete dossier contents  processes  files and notes      183       E knowledgeTools    Viewer  If the Dossier Module is installed  then it is not possible access dossiers or create    processes with this access right     16 4 3  Special Access Rights When Using the Tutorial Module    Superv
184. n open behind the displayed node are closed    In order to quickly access the first node of a tree  the so called Start Node  open the       Navigation    menu and click on the    Go To General Start Node    option  Alternatively  you    may also click on the    icon in the toolbar  The tree sections that are already open will    not be closed if you use this method     2 4 1  Moving the Tree    If you want to view a section of the tree that is outside the window  it is possible to  reposition the tree according to your needs  For this purpose there are sensitive buttons  on the outer edges of the tree view  These extend along the entire height and width of  the window and are marked by white arrows    Move the mouse pointer to the edge of the screen  As soon as you reach the sensitive  button  it will be graphically highlighted  Click on the button as many times as is  necessary for the tree to move to the required position  The tree always moves away  from the edge where the mouse pointer is positioned  e g  if the mouse pointer is at the  top of the screen  the tree will move further down     You can also use the drag and drop function to move the tree  Click on the left mouse  button in the blue background area of the tree window and continue to press the mouse  button  The tree can now be moved to the required position  When the mouse button is    released  the tree is placed in that position     2 4 2  Moving the Tree Using the Mouse Scroll Wheel    Scroll the wheel upw
185. n order to do so     simply navigate to another node and click on the    icon again     10 6 3  Deleting Links Between Nodes and Text Sections    You can delete the link between a text section and a node at any time  In order to do so   you can either start at the node or at the text section   Navigate to the node that you want to delete the link of   2  Click on the E  icon at the bottom right hand corner of the node  The linked text    section will now be accessed in the sidebar     3  Click on the   gt  icon above the beginning of the linked section  the link will now be    deleted     El Demoscript s       Cl search for page number Unlinked sections  w A H elt Oradh  Demoscript  E  PartI  Heading 1    1 fh   Lorem ipsum dolor sit amet  consetetur sadipscing elitr  sed  diam nonumy eirmod tempor invidunt ut labore et dolore  magna aliquyam erat  sed diam voluptua  At vero eos et  accusam et justo duo dolores et ea rebum     2  lt  gt  gh 2    Stet clita kasd gubergren  no sea takimata sanctus est Lorem  ipsum dolor sit amet     24 gt  aft  At vero eos et accusam et justo duo dolores et ea rebum  Stet    clita kasd gubergren  no sea takimata sanctus est Lorem  ipsum dolor sit amet     Part II  Part III          Fig   A document with assigned section markings and a linked section  Alternatively  you can also delete the link starting from the document   1  In the sidebar  navigate to the text section that you want to delete the link of   2  Click on the icon above the beginni
186. ndow  The window will    then be enlarged and three additional fields will be displayed     Value        Emin    and    Emax        54  Be      lusion Dlx      Byes  4 000 000 00  ok    Emin  540 000 00 F    Emax  S40 000 00 F       Fig   The input window with value and expected value s  fields    Enter a figure in the input field labelled    Value    and then click on the  OK  button on the  right           NOTE  After you confirm your entry by clicking on the  OK  button  the value that you    have entered will be used for the calculations        The expected value that has been calculated from the probability of occurrence of the    node and the entered value will now be displayed in the fields    Emin    and    Emax        The expected value is the product of the probability of occurrence and the value     158       E knowledgeTools    If you have previously entered an exact probability of occurrence  e g  60    then the  values for Emin and Emax are identical  If you have entered a range of possible probabilities  of occurrence  e g  60  to 90    then   e the minimum expected value  Emin is calculated from the product of the value and  the minimum probability of occurrence Pmin  therefore 60    e the maximum expected value  Emax is calculated from the product of the value  and the maximum probability of occurrence Pmax  therefore 90     The entered values and the calculated expected values  as well as the probabilities of  occurrence  are saved in a process   If you want
187. ne Editor           sssssssssnnsnrnnsrrrrrsnrnrerenrrrrnrrrene 63  6 3  The Text Editing Options of the Text Editor            ccccccceeeeseseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeneees 63  6 3 1  BOK TOK sae en ee ee ee ee E ee en ee ee et ee 63  ote an BAN COC seracccsacsueraneras cate E en aces eee aan E A AE AA 63  6 3 3  WAGEMINGC TOR sanceacaterseasaertancatenseetessnetetseenetenesenttetteeartenenentieerannenee 63  6 3 4  MEUN NUMO N er E E EEA 64  6 3 5  Inserting BUNG ES  tccsarccniaanpacenatecaniaaesirinacsesesactxstaianis Aia 64  6 3 6  INSCHUING IMAG CS eorna ra EE EE E E EE E EiS 64  6 4  Inserting Links to WeDSitES sirrrirsrirrirornirsrirrirrirrnir nrn rrai 64  6 5  mMser  ng Lnks tO FiCS ausirsninii nna a EE 64  6 6  Creating Links to Laws and DECISIONS            ccc cece cece eeeeeeee eee eeeeeeeeeeenags 65  6 6 1  ciung CAW e E E E N 66  6 6 2  CIGING DOCIS ONS orrara E OE ERA 66  6 6 3  CAFU NUMWOClS er EE E A A A 66      knowledgeTools    6 6 4  CRAG DECI CCS ciisnircdnveies ct vearcanacedca sieaeaictine E 66  6 7  Inserung FOOWIOl CS risora nair 67  6 8  FS SFA Ira OS iorra Naa aA 67  6 9  Additional Text Editor Options           ccc cccccccccceeeeeeeee seen eee e nese eeeeeeeeeeeeeeennnnegs 67   6 9 1  Deleting Existing Text With a Mouse CLICK         cccccccceceee eee e eee eeeeeeeeaeaanes 67   6 9 2  Cancel Text Editing Without Saving the TeXxt          cc ccccccceceeeeeeeeeeee eee e ees 67   6 9 3  Using the Undo FUNCTION  stesccscticeatauaiunaiedidvesencidecbar car entin d
188. ng calculation operations are currently available  addition  subtraction   multiplication and division  These operations can be used in formula fields with the  following notation     e subformula subformula  addition     e subformula subformula  subtraction   e subformula subformula  multiplication   e subformula subformula  division     Example  A1 10  multiplies the numerical value entered in the field A1 by 10           NOTES    Operands and operators cannot be separated by a space     Multiplication and division have a higher precedence than addition and subtraction     The operators are left associative  i e  A op B op C op D is interpreted as    A op B  op C  op D   For example  A B C D   A B  C  D       165         knowledgeTools    13 2 4  Functions    In addition to the above mentioned calculation operations  you also have the option to    use the following functions       max     asin       min     acos       sqrt     atan       log     asinh      sin     acosh      cos     atanh      tan     abs       sinh     floor       expt     celling      cosh     truncate      tanh     round      Multiple arguments are always separated by a semicolon     Example  max argument1 argument2     13 3  Performing Calculations    Whereas the calculation fields are created in structure editor mode  the actual calculation  occurs in normal mode within the process    If you open a tree that has been configured for calculations as described above  then a  sidebar will appear on the rig
189. ng of the section to check which node the    section is linked to     123      knowledgeTools    3  If the text section is only linked to a single node  then this node will be accessed  directly  Click on the    icon to delete the link between the current node and the  text section    4  If the text section is linked to more than one node  then all of the linked nodes  will be displayed in a new window  Click on the title of the node in this window to  access the respective node  Delete the links  where applicable  by clicking on    the    icon  Please note that you must delete links to several nodes individually     10 6 4  Searching In Texts    You can search in the full text of the different texts in the sidebar  The search will only be  performed in the respective displayed text and not in text in another tab     Enter your search term in the input field and click on the  Search  button     The user has several search options    e if two search terms are entered after each other  i e  without an operand   term1 term2  then the texts that contain both term1 AND term2 will be searched for   e if only a single search term is entered     term     then this exact search term will be searched for   e if only part of the search term is entered followed by an asterisk as a wild card  term   then all words that consist of    term    and any other number of characters will be            searched for  e g     term inal    or    term inology     e if the search term is entered follow
190. not available if the user has  selected the application type     Risk Analysis       Mark Modules   If this option is activated  then nodes that appear several times  in a tree  modules  are marked as such  This is indicated by the presence of  the  IM  icon at the bottom right hand corner of the node in question    Scripts and File Shares   If the Dataroom Module is installed on your LOGOS  installation  identifiable by the    Dataroom    tab at the top of the screen   then  you can display directories and files from the dataroom  as well as specially  prepared texts  in a sidebar next to the tree and create links between the nodes    of the tree and the individual files and or text sections of a document  When this    38      knowledgeTools    option is activated  two selection lists     Select Files    and    Select Texts    appear  In  the first list you can select the datarooms that you want to display the sidebar and  in the second list you can determine the documents that you want to display in    the sidebar  Both selection lists allow multiple selections           NOTE  Detailed information on the use of the dataroom and the corresponding sidebar is    available further on in the User   s Manual        Click on the  Save  button to save your changes to the settings  You will now be  asked whether you would like to reload the client with the new settings  Click on     Reload   the changes that you have made will come into effect immediately           NOTE  Detailed in
191. not be able to use it           NOTE  In order to allow users to actually use the template that you have created  ensure    that the knowledge tree referred to in the template is activated for all users        11 5     Editing Existing Process Templates    Click on the    Templates    tab   Click on  Edit Existing Template   All of the existing template folders will be  displayed   Click on the folder icon in front of the name of a template directory in order to  open the directory  Select the template that you want to edit by clicking on the  selection button in front of the name of a template   Click on the  Edit  button below   You can now make the following changes to the process template    e the name of the template    e the knowledge tree that is referred to    e the entry point and   e the applied layout template     Finish by clicking on the  Save  button to save your changes     134          knowledgeTools    11 6  Deleting Existing Process Templates    Click on the    Templates    tab    2  Click on  Edit Existing Template   All of the existing template folders will be  displayed    3  Click on the folder icon in front of the name of a template directory in order to  open the directory  Select the template that you want to delete by clicking on the  selection button in front of the name of a template     4  You can now delete the template by clicking on the  Delete  button below     11 7  Working With Dossiers    Dossiers contain processes  files and documents that
192. nowledgeTools    4 3  Activating an Imported or Newly Created knowledgeTool          NOTE  When a knowledgeTool is first imported it is not visible to any user  Therefore the  users that are to be granted access to this new knowledgeTool must first be activated for  the tool in the user administration    It is only possible to activate a tool for users if you possess the    User Admin    access    right        Open your web browser  we recommend that you use Internet Explorer     2  Enter the address of your LOGOS server and press the    Enter    key  the address  is     http   your_server_name knowledgetools dms        3  Login with your login information    4  Click on the    Users    tab    Enter the first name  surname or e mail address of the user that you want to  grant access to the newly imported knowledgeTool in the field labelled    Search  for    and click on  Search     When the search results appear  click on the name of the corresponding user    You will now see all the access rights of the selected user  Click on the white  arrow next to    Access rights for knowledge areas       8  In the    Access rights for knowledge areas    section  you will now see a list of all  the available knowledgeTools on the system  including the name of the newly  imported knowledgeTool  Check boxes will be displayed next to the name of each  knowledgeTool with the following labels     Read        Edit    and    Process Analysis       9  Click on the check box in the column labell
193. nserting a company logo or a  letterhead    4  Enter the text   knowledgetools_ document  at the position in the document where  you want to insert the data from the tree  text modules and input fields data    Please note that lower case letters and square brackets are used  This text will  function as a placeholder for the data that you want to insert    5  Save the document as a Word document  filename extension    DOC     with a name    of your choice     131         knowledgeTools    Datei Bearbeiten Ansicht Einf  gen Formak Extras Tabele Fenster 7    xk  Cees  amp lay A o  A E J 100     2   gt  Standard   F    Boies A  PET  a RE CO CRO CREE a   rl    kt Anrede       2   kt Yorname      kt Nachname       z   kt Strasse      kt Hausnummer           kt PLZ      mw   2  know ledgetools_document    4   T     Bitte ein Feld ausw  hlen Feldeigenschaften Feldoptionen   a Kategorien  Feldname    z  Alle  JktLOrt   T Zuvor einzufiigender     Text      Feldnamen  Format    Danach einzufligender   zi  keine  Text    a i Grossbuchstaben   Zugeordnetes Feld   Kleinbuchstaben   7 Satzanfang gross       m i Erster Buchstabe gross   Vertikale Formatierung     E          E    R Beschreibung    m F  gt ein Seriendruckfeld ein   Ki i Formatierung bei Aktualisierung beibehalten    03a        Feldfunktioner   bbrechen    Zeichnen    2s  AutoFormen     s   w _Eslefunktionen      Seite 1 ob 1 if Bei 44cm Fe 4 Sp il Deutsch  De  Ge    Fig   Creating fields    In addition  you can include data fr
194. ntact us if you require any information concerning the system    requirements for server operation     10    E knowledgeTools    2  An Introduction to Working With knowledgeTools    2 1  The knowledgeTools   Method    The knowledgeTools   method is used to analyse and illustrate rule based fields of  knowledge  The knowledge is subdivided into individual pieces of information and this  individual information is in turn stored in so called nodes  These nodes are then  associated with one another in the form of a navigable knowledge tree  The principle  behind association is to associate the nodes in a way that the result  e g  of a specified  sequence of operations  is placed at the top of the tree as the parent node  and the child  nodes  which are the preconditions for the achievement of the result  are placed below it   A knowledge tree of this kind may be freely arranged  thus an individual precondition  may also constitute an intermediate result  whose achievement in turn requires the  fulfilment of the preconditions that are placed below it  Therefore this method makes the  abstract illustration of rule based fields of knowledge possible at any required depth and  for every conceivable possibility that exists in order to achieve the result    When using such a knowledgeTool  the user can use the mass of abstractly illustrated  rules to select those rules that are applicable to their particular situation in order to  achieve a concrete objective    The navigation within a
195. ode of the tree in structure editor mode   These calculation fields can then later be used to enter values or output calculation  results in normal mode  In order to perform calculations  you require    e at least one field to enter a numerical value and   e at least one field that contains a formula that is referenced to the input field and    can be used for calculations with the value that is later entered in the other field     In order to create calculation fields  you must configure knowledgeTools trees for the use  of calculation fields  It is only necessary to perform this action once  In order to do so   proceed as follows    1  Open the tree in structure editor mode    2  Open the    Navigation    menu and select the    Technical Tree Properties    option    3  Click on the check box labelled    Calculation Fields       4  Click on the  Save  button    5  The    Technical Tree Properties    window will now close  Click on the  Reload    button to reload the client and the sidebar for entering calculation fields will be    displayed on the right hand side of the screen     Calculation fields always belong to a single specific node  i e  they do not depend on the  path  Therefore  for example  it is also possible for a value that has been entered once in  a field of a node that appears multiple times in a tree  to also be available in all instances    of the node  i e  all nodes with the same ID      163    E knowledgeTools    Start by selecting the node that you want
196. of the knowledgeTool    will be displayed as a new task that is to be executed     48          E knowledgeTools    Please click on the P icon to start the export process  If you want to delete the  export task  then please click on the M icon    After the successful export  the message     Completed Successfully     will be  displayed in the task window  Click on the IO icon to download the    KTD    file   Please then click on the M icon to remove the successfully completed task from    the task window     5  Editing Knowledge Trees    Access to knowledge trees occurs through your portfolio  If you possess the    corresponding authorizations  you can also open knowledge trees in your portfolio and  edit them     5 1     Open your web browser  we recommend that you use Internet Explorer     Enter the address of your LOGOS server and press the    Enter    key  the address  is     http   your_server_name knowledgetools dms       Login with your login information    Click on the  Edit  button next to the name of the knowledgeTool that you want to    edit and it will open in editor mode     Editing Node Properties    At first  newly created knowledge trees consist only of a single empty node  the start    node   This node  as well as any other nodes that you create later on  have certain    properties that you can edit        Atk   a okt ee oe  Altern athyvtext    a       7 8 9 10 11  12    Fig   The properties of a node    49       knowledgeTools    The above illustration shows 
197. of the tree section that you want to copy     Open the    Edit    menu in the menu bar     Click on    Copy Branch     Alternatively  you can click on the 75 icon in the toolbar   This function is also available in the shortcut menu   Click on the node to that you want to attach the copy of the tree section to     Open the    Edit    menu in the menu bar     Click on    Insert     Alternatively  you can click on the E icon in the toolbar   This  function is also available in the shortcut menu   The copy of the tree section will  now be created    Open the    Properties    window    Using the    Properties    window  click on the parent node and determine how you  want it to be logically associated with the tree section that has just been created    or  use the pie menu     Creating the Instance of a Node or Tree Section    Contrary to when creating a copy  where a    physical    copy is created  which can be    edited independently from the original   when the instance of a node or a tree section is    created  it is a reference to the original  This means that any changes that are made to    the instance also affect the original and vice versa     Creating an Instance     1   Z     3     Click on the node that you want to create an instance of     Open the    Edit    menu in the menu bar     Click on    Memorise Node     Alternatively  you can click on the Gi icon in the  toolbar   Click on the node that you want to attach the instance to or above     Open the    Edit    men
198. om the master data fields  This is useful  for example   when you want to include contact details from a dossier such as the recipient data in a  letter  In order to include data from the master data fields in the document  follow steps  1 to 4 described above and then continue as follows    1  Click on the position in the document where you want to insert data from a  master data field    2  Open the    Insert    menu and select the    Field    option    Select the    MergeField    option from the    Field names    list  see figure above     4  Enter  kt  master data field name  in the input field labelled    Field name     Enter  the name of the master data field that you want to take the data from under  master data field name    Click on  OK    6  You can now enter additional placeholders of this type by repeating steps 1 to 5     132      knowledgeTools    7  Finish by saving the layout template as a Word document     filename extension    DOC     with a name of your choice           NOTE  Alternatively  you can also insert master data fields in the text modules        The created layout template must now be added to a process template in a subsequent    step     11 4  Creating Process Templates    In order to generate processes  and documents  when using the Dossier Module  process  templates are required   In order to create a process  and documents that are based on it  the user requires the  following information    e the tree in which you want to create the process 
199. omatically becomes a link that opens the  corresponding files  In order to use the automatic linking function    e the files must be located in a dataroom on the server    e this dataroom must be entered in the properties of the script    e the names of the files must follow a standardized nomenclature    e g     documenti pdf        document2 pdf     etc     e the nomenclature must be entered in the properties of the script  so that the files    that you want to link are recognized by the system     Therefore  you must first create a dataroom on the server and upload the files that you  want to link to the dataroom  Alternatively  you can also upload the files to an existing  dataroom     Open the    Properties    window of the script that you should contain the links to the files    by clicking on the name of the script and then on the    p icon  Click on the    Select    link  and all the existing datarooms that are available to you will now be displayed in a new  window  Select the dataroom that contains the files by clicking on it once with the  mouse  If you have uploaded the files to a subdirectory of the dataroom  then please  select the subdirectory in question  Click on the  Apply  button and the selected  dataroom  as well as any directory that may have been selected  will be displayed above  the    Select    link  You can always undo this selection by clicking on the link labelled     Undo Link       You must now enter the nomenclature for the files that you want 
200. on    will be displayed under each    version  Click on this link to publish the corresponding version     39               knowledgeTools    8  The users that have already been activated for access to the tool will  automatically see the newly published version of the tool the next time they  access the tool  Those users that have not yet been activated for access to the  tool will still have to be activated     40       knowledgeTools    4  Importing and Exporting Data    The user has the option to export knowledgeTools  as well as  e Datarooms  e Scripts  e Laws and  e Decisions    to a file  e g  on another LOGOS server  and then import them again     4 1  Data Exchange  Importing a knowledgeTool from a File    knowledgeTools may be transferred from one computer to another in the form of  so called product files or    KIP    files  If you already have such knowledgeTools  then you    can import these to your LOGOS server           NOTE  You must possess the    Tree Admin    administrative access right in order to be able    to perform this task              NOTE  When importing a knowledgeTool that is linked to a script  it is essential that first    the script and then the knowledgeTool are imported              NOTE  When importing a knowledgeTool that is linked to a dataroom  it is essential that    first the dataroom and then the knowledgeTool are imported              NOTE  If the knowledgeTool is linked to both a script  as well as a dataroom  then the  script and t
201. onal Functions    In knowledgeTools that have been assigned the application type     Risk Analysis     there  are various dependencies between the options in the technical tree properties of the    knowledgeTool and the entry and calculation of probabilities of occurrence     Strict colors  If the force colour marking option is activated  then the user can only enter a probability    of occurrence at the child node and not at the parent node     Bivalent Logic  The    Two Valued Logic    option cannot be activated in knowledgeTools that have been    assigned the application type     Risk Analysis        Suppress Display of Computed Data  If this option has been activated  then the probabilities of occurrence in the tree are still  calculated from right to left  however  the display of the calculated probability of    occurrence at the parent node is suppressed     Additional Functions When Using the Dossier Module  If the Dossier Module is activated on your server  then your processes are saved and  displayed in a dossier  In this case  additional information is supplied when viewing the    dossier  if the processes have been created within the framework of a risk analysis          Demo    O       Fig   The display of a risk analysis process    In this case  the    icon appears on the right next to the name of the process if there is    a calculated probability at the start node of the corresponding knowledgeTool  If there is    161    E knowledgeTools    also a calculated ex
202. onal information is integrated  however  by using the drop down list     the user can select the additional information that is to be integrated     Grey Background  Apply a tick to this check box if you want the additional information in the table of    contents to be shaded grey for better distinction     File Format  The user can determine whether the table of contents should be created in    HTML       format  as an    RTF    file that can be edited in  e g  MS Word or as a    PDF    document     Include Modules Only One Time Each  Nodes and tree sections can appear more than once in a tree  modules   If you want  modules that exist more than once  to only be displayed once in the table of contents     then apply a tick to this check box     Restrict To Colored Nodes  The user can specify that only certain colour markings should be included in the table of  contents  Use the drop down list to select the node colours that should be included in the    table of contents     Restrict to Weighted Nodes  The user can specify that only nodes with a certain weighting should be included in the  table of contents  Use the drop down list to select the weighting that should be included    in the table of contents   Restrict to Path    The table of contents can be created from the first node of a tree  start node  or it can    start from any other selected node     82      knowledgeTools    If you select the second option  then apply a tick to the check box labelled    Limit to Path  
203. or   This ensures that each user has    access to the exact functions that they require for their daily work  In addition  certain    functions and  whether or not they are displayed  depend on the modules that have been    installed on the server  e g  Dossier Module or Dataroom Module      The different views of the information that is stored on the system  as well as the    different functions  are accessible using the tabs at the top of the screen     By using the    Dossiers    tab  you can access your dossiers  as well as the  processes  files and documents contained in them  this tab is only visible if the  Dossier Module is installed on your server     By using the    Knowledge    tab  you can access the knowledge trees that have  been activated for you  In addition  you can also create new trees and or edit  existing trees in this section  if you possess the corresponding authorizations    By using the    Reporting    tab  you can access various analyses on the use of the  knowledge trees and or the processes that have been created in them    By using the    Templates    tab  you can access the process and layout templates  that are available on your system   this tab is only visible if the Dossier Module is  installed on your server    By using the    Options    tab  you can determine which master data fields should  be made available for the dossiers on your system  this tab is only visible if the  Dossier Module is installed on your server   as well as import and 
204. ore  backups should only be created when there are no    or only very few users working on the server        When you create backups using the web console  as opposed to creating backups using  the server console   you do not have the option to determine a backup directory of your  choice  Instead  the backup will be saved in the default    backup    directory in the    installation directory     207             knowledgeTools    In order to create a full backup  proceed as follows   1  Click on the    Backup    tab at the top of your screen if the tab is not already active     2  Click on the  Create Backup  button and the backup will be created immediately     The backup can only be restored using the LOGOS server console  see above      208      knowledgeTools    19  Handling Technical Problems    LOGOS is a robust that has undergone countless automatic and manual tests prior to  being supplied  Nevertheless  the fact that we are dealing with an overall system of great  complexity  particularly in terms of the necessary interaction with software components  from other software providers  means that it is impossible to completely rule out any  problems when working with LOGOS  In general  these problems only affect the display    of data in the client and the loss of data that is saved on the server is unlikely           NOTE  You are strongly advised to implement regular backups of the system in order to    avoid any loss of data        19 1  Resolving Problems    In the e
205. orner of the respective  tab    3  You can now enter the text of your choice  However  this step is optional and the  input fields can also be used without any additional text     4  Click on the position in the text where you want to insert the input field with the    mouse and click on the icon in the toolbar    5  The names  labels  of all the input fields that are available for the selected node  will now be displayed in the selection list that appears  In addition  the master  data fields of your dossiers will also be displayed  you have the option to integrate  these into the text as well  also refer to chapter 11 9 5 below     6  Select one of the input fields by clicking on it with the mouse  The input field will  now be integrated into the text     7  Click on  Save  to save the text module     Of course  it is also possible to insert more than one input field into a text module  In  order to do so  simply repeat steps 4 and 5    Nodes that have input fields for document generation in their text modules are indicated  by the presence of a small blue icon at the bottom right hand corner of the node  If you  move the mouse pointer over this icon  then the title of the input field will be displayed   In addition  the title will be coloured green or red to display which text module the field    belongs to  green      True    or red      False         11 9 5  Integrating Master Data Fields    If the Dossier Module is installed on your server  see below   then you can inte
206. orting DataroOmMs       c ccc cccccceeeeee eee e eee e eens eeeeeeeeaneeneeenees 46  4 8  Data Exchange  Importing Dat rOOMs         cccccccceeeee eee e eset eee e ee eeeeeeeeeeeenennnes 47  4 9  Data Exchange  Exporting a knowledgeTool to a File         cece cecceeeee eee e eee eees 47  4 10  Data Exchange  Exporting a knowledgeTool to a    KTD    Fil                  ccceeeeee 48  5  Editing Knowledge Trees sisiicevistccccisestinrdestvareusnvnewsuscrisseteersancdeunsseceNensnes 49  Jsl  Editing Node Properties ncsssciancenemevaderaiaccespaneaacaesseuianes iiao 49  SA Editing Titles  Alternative Texts  Node Colours and Weighting      s  ssssssessssssn  51    e  GING AS OCIO ar E E EE 51      knowledgeTools    5 4  AUTOMA SAVING vascvestoaievannsaicveptuesdaette ES 52  5 5  Editing the Position Of a Node            ssssssssssssssnsssnnssnsnsnnsnsnnsnennsnrnnensnnesnnnne 52  5 6  Creating a New Node            ssssssssssssnsssnnssnnnsnssnsnnnnsnennensnnssnnnsnennsnrensnennenrnne 53  5 7  Creating an Original New Node        sssssssssssssnnnsnrnnsrrnnsnrnnrnrnnrnrnrrnnrnrnrnnrnrnnr 53  5 8  Creating an Original New Node Above a Child Node           ccccccceeeteeeeeeeeeeeaes 53  5 9  Creating an Original New Node Behind a NOE         ccccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeteeseeeeeeseaes 53  5 10  Creating an Original New Node Before a Node        ccccccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeenseaes 54  Delis  COPYING te NOQG arimearen RENERIEN ann ndnaatedstcauauananaiannieds 54  Jd CoOpyinga Iree Se CUION jacave
207. orum Contribution    window    Nodes that already have existing forum contributions are indicated by the presence of a    minimized version of the EE icon at the bottom right hand corner of the node     28      knowledgeTools    2 12 2  Viewing the Forum Contributions of an Individual Node    There are two available methods to retrieve the forum contributions of an individual  node   e Click on the minimized forum icon at the bottom right hand corner of the node     e Open the    View    menu in the main menu and select    Show Forum        In the forum window  you will see all the existing contributions to the forum on the  left hand side of the window  Click on the topic of a contribution to read it  Contributions  that have already been answered by other users are marked with a    plus    sign in front of    the topic  Click on the    plus    sign in order to open up the hierarchy of contributions     2 12 3  Replying to Forum Contributions    Open the forum as described above    Select a contribution by clicking on the topic of the contribution   Click on  Compose reply     Enter your text in the input field above    Click on  Send      E SE     2 12 4  Viewing the Forum Contributions for the Entire Tree    If you do not want to open every single node of a tree to read the respective forum  contributions  then you may also view the list of all the forum contributions for the entire  tree   1  Open the    Navigation    menu in the main menu and   click on the     All Forum
208. ossier Administration    Data is stored in dossiers  Each dossier has a name and optionally definable master data  fields  The users have the option to save additional information on the dossiers in the  master data fields  e g  contact details    Click on the    Options    tab in order to determine which master data fields are available    for the dossiers on your server           NOTE  The configuration of the master data fields applies for the entire server  i e  for all    of the dossiers on your server        The fields that are currently available in the dossiers on your server are displayed in the  line labelled    Currently Used Master Data Fields     After the installation of the system  this  line is initially empty  You can now either    1  Select the applicable options from a list of predefined master data fields    2  Create your own custom master data fields or    3  Select a mix of created and predefined fields     128            knowledgeTools       knowledgeTools   Mozilla Firefox BAX    Datei Bearbeiten Ansicht Chronik Lesezeichen Extras Hilfe       Dossiers Knowledge Tutorials Datarooms Reporting Templates  gt  Options    You can determine the master data fields that you want your dossiers to contain here     Options  Currently used master data fields    Add new field    Available standard fields   Apply  F  Company  Apply  F  Department  Apply  O Salutation  Apply  O Title   Apply  O First name  Apply  O Surname  Apply  O Street   Apply  F  Street number  
209. ot already open   Click on the    Logical Association    drop down list and select the required  association by clicking on it once with the mouse   4  Click on the  Save  button to save your changes     51       E knowledgeTools    Alternatively  you also have the option to select the logical association with the help of  the so called pie menu   1  Move the mouse pointer over the association line between the nodes  The existing  logical association will then be brightly highlighted   2  Click on the association line once with the left mouse button and the pie menu will  open   3  Move the mouse pointer to the required logical association  The selection will be  highlighted in orange   4  Confirm your selection by clicking on it with the left mouse button     The association will be changed according to your selection with immediate effect       Third assumption    Fig   The pie menu in the knowledgeTool       5 4  Automatic Saving    The    Automatic Save    function relieves you from having to click on the  Save  button in  the    Node Properties    window after changing the properties of the node  In order to save  the changes  it suffices to simply click on any other node    If the    Automatic Save    function has not yet been activated on your system  then open    the    View    menu and click on    Automatic Save        5 5  Editing the Position of a Node    The user has the option to change the vertical position of a node within a tree section  one step at a time   1
210. ou can enter and edit  text in this window  The functions of this text editor are practically identical to the  functions of the one for editing the additional texts  The only functions that are  not available are the functions for integrating images  files  input fields and  master data fields    Click on the  Save  button in order to save the text that you have entered  Click    on  Delete Text  in order to delete the existing text     A number will appear on the left  next to the newly created text block  this is the unique    ID of the text block  The ID is useful for an improved overview  e g  when you want to    move text blocks  see below   The ID is only visible in editor mode     115      knowledgeTools    You can create as many text blocks as you want under a section  If you select a text  block  or a text block is already selected   the next new text block will be created under    the currently selected text block     10 3 3  Renaming Scripts and Setting Links    You have the option to rename existing scripts     1  In order to do so  click on the underlined name of the script in the Script Editor     Click on the Sh icon and the    Edit Script    window appears   The current name of the script is displayed in the input field labelled    Name        Enter the new name of the script in this input field and click on the  Save  button     Scripts can be automatically linked to files  For example  if you enter the name of a  certain file in a script  then this name aut
211. pboard     6 9 7  Cutting Contents    In order to cut out text  click on the db icon  The cut text is copied to the clipboard and    can then be pasted into the text by clicking on the Fel Icon     68      knowledgeTools    7  Document Generation    By using the document generator  you can dynamically generate documents from  individual text modules  depending on the previously assigned logical colour marking  In  order to do this  the knowledge tree in question must be assigned the application type      Document Generator     in the technical tree properties and text modules should be    assigned to the node of the tree           NOTE  If the Dossier Module is installed on your server then you have additional features  available for the generation of documents  The methods described below only apply if  you are not using the Dossier Module  The methods for the generation of documents    when using the Dossier Module are described further on in the User   s Manual              NOTE  The generation of documents occurs in Microsoft Word  therefore you must have  Microsoft Word installed on your PC  The data exchange is controlled by ActiveX     therefore document generation is only possible when using Internet Explorer        7 1  System Requirements    In order to use the document generator  the following system requirements must be met  by the author and the user   e Operating system  MS Windows 2000  Microsoft XP or Microsoft Vista  e Installed Internet Explorer version 6 or
212. pected value at the start node  then the E icon will also be  displayed   If you move the mouse pointer over the icon  then the corresponding exact value will be    displayed in a tooltip  see figure above      Additional Analysis Options  If the knowledgeTool has the application type     Risk Analysis     activated  then additional  analysis functions are available  These are described later on in the chapter on    Using    Statistics        162       knowledgeTools    13  Using the Calculator Module with knowledgeTools    The calculator module allows the user to perform calculations within a knowledge tree on  the basis of predefined calculation formulas  In addition  the user also has the option to  attach fields that can contain numerical values or formulas to the nodes of a tree    The calculation occurs within a process  irrespective of the logic of the knowledge tree or  the logical marking     True        False    or    Not Checked     of the node of a tree  The entered  numerical values and calculation results are saved within a process and can be exported  to MS Excel  The entered and calculated numerical values are treated as double precision  floating point numbers    In order to use the Calculator Module  you require the corresponding licence on your  LOGOS server     13 1  Configuring Calculations     Creating Formula Fields    In order to enter numerical values for calculations in a knowledgeTool  you must first  define calculation fields at the corresponding n
213. process analysis provides an accumulated graphical display of the    working results of all the processes of a tree        Process       demo   Proce       S knowledgeTools   Mozilla Firefox  es   ole    Datei Bearbeiten Ansicht Chronik Lesezeichen Extras Hilfe    Dossiers Knowledge Tutorials Datarooms Reporting Templates Options    Edit Scripts View Navigation Help  BOYX 7B 8FAOORS   i  AGO  A Frstassuneton a      s analysis   Version 40    Process analysis      x   Second assumption  x3      X True 2m0   Xlby user    Fatset1 0   lvy logic  Not checked 2 5     First assumption  a Second assumption    Third assumption    Cancel    Fig   Graphical process analysis    In this analysis  a stacked bar chart is displayed next to each node of a tree  The bar    chart shows how often the node has been marked as    True     green  or    False     red  in    relation to all the processes that have been created in the tree  Therefore a bar chart      knowledgeTools    with identical red and green bars would mean that the corresponding node has been  marked as    True    in 50  of all the processes and marked as    False    in the other 50  of  all the processes    White sections in the bar chart represent processes where the nodes have not yet been  marked or have been explicitly set as    Not Checked        The graphical process analysis is suitable for analysing processing trends     If you move over the bar with the mouse pointer  then detailed information on the  individual nodes w
214. question by clicking on it with the mouse and then click on the al icon     Entering Other Versions  If you want to enter different versions of a law that were valid during different periods   then please proceed as follows     1  Select the corresponding regulation by clicking on it with the mouse     Click on the   icon at the top in the right hand section of the screen    Click on  New Text Version  in the editing window and complete the input fields   Please make sure to complete the two input fields that define the period of validity  of the law     4  Save your entries by clicking on  Save      8 5  Managing Laws and Decisions     Exporting  Importing and Deleting    The user has the option to import and export laws and decisions to and from the Legal  Database in the form of product files and to thus exchange the respective contents with  the users of other LOGOS servers  In addition  you can also delete the existing laws and    decisions in your Legal Database     8 5 1  Exporting Laws          NOTE  You must possess the    Tree Admin    administrative access right in order to be able    to perform this task        93          KR W N HF       knowledgeTools      Click on the    Options    tab     Please then click on    Manage Laws and Decisions        Click on the button labelled  Show all acts        An alphabetically sorted list of all the laws that exist on your server will now be    displayed  You now have the option to export one or more laws  In order to do so 
215. r inoa 68   6 9 4  Using the Redo FUN CE Ol awaiccattcontevsraossannadepsewasevarsenetepreaiaerrestatenrdvaaces 68   6 9 5  Copying Contents to the CliPDOArd          ccccccseeeseeeeeeeeeeseeeeeteeueeeeeeeneeags 68   6 9 6  Inserting Copied Contents from the Clipboard            ccccecceeeteeseeeeeeeeeeees 68   6 9 7  CUTTING    CONCEN CS a tian cuaten E EOE 68   DOCUMENT Generation         s s s                         225u2u22u20 20 20u20uuuunnnnnnnnnnnnnnnn 69  7 1  Sy Stem I COUIFCIIGIUS T T T T T TETT 69   Filed  Using the Document Generator           ccccceeeeseeeeeseeneeeeeeeeeeesseeeegnennaannees 70   7 1 2  Preparing the Knowledge Tree for Document Generation        ssssssssrsrrsrss 7i   7 1 3  Integrating Input FieldS          sssssnsssssssssssnssssnsnssnsssnnssrnnssnnnesnsnesnsnenrene 7i   7 1 4  Using Me SIG CD al cua davawsuanenadsamanarensdsadouraiinceencsanaoera tent anee ETETE E 72  li Uong INP UCF ea E E E EE 73   7 2 1  Creaung INDUC ICIS sirinin E EEE E A 74   VEENA Editing Existing Input FieldS          ssssssssssssssssnnsssnnssnnnsnnsnesnsnrnnesrnnesrnnne 75  7 3  DOCUM C ENTAO sin seta acesc at cae nee earne a a a a a E one 76   Tos Editing Generated DOCUMENTS             cccccceeeeeeeeeseeeeessnnnnnnneeeeeesseeeaeaaaes 77  7d  Creating a Table of Contents            sssssssssssenssrnnesnnnensnnsnrsnsnronesrenesnsnesnsnnes 80   The LEGal D  ataDaSE rrna EA ARANA 84  8 1  NTU LAN aea a E R E E E RASARE 84   8 1 1  Viewing Laws in the DatabaSe        ccccc
216. r these markings have been manually set by users or set by the system on the    basis of the tree logic           NOTE  Only processes that have been created in the currently published version of the  tree are displayed  Processes that have been created in older versions of the tree are not    displayed        The analysis is displayed in a table   e the    Node Title    column lists the title of the node where a colour marking has  been assigned in a process  e the    Path    column displays the path of the node in order to clearly identify it  e the    True  manual     column shows how often the    green    colour marking     i e     True     has been manually assigned by users at the node    188          E knowledgeTools    the    False  manual     column shows how often the    red    colour marking   i e     False     has been manually assigned by users at the node   the    True  logic     column shows how often the    green    colour marking   i e     True     has been automatically assigned by the system on the basis of the  logical colour marking system   the    False  logic     column shows how often the    red    colour marking  i e     False      has been automatically assigned by the system on the basis of the logical colour    marking system     The analysis can also be downloaded as an    XLS    file  e g  for further processing in    Excel   In order to do so  click on the  Download Excel  button     17 2  The Graphical Process Analysis    This variation of the 
217. ranted to the  entire user group  Access rights are granted in the user administration section  as  described earlier on    The access rights structure and the available authorization levels are described in the    following chapter           NOTE  A tabular summary of the access rights structure of the LOGOS server is available    further on in chapter 16 5        16 1  Global Access Rights    The global access rights primarily determine the functions that are generally available to  a user or user group  However  in order to use certain functions  it is also necessary to    define the access rights for individual knowledge trees  see chapter 16 3      16 1 1  Supervisor    This authorization level consists of the most extensive global access rights  Users and or  user groups that possess this authorization level are generally able to   e open trees for reading  if they also possess read access to the trees   see chapter 16 3 1   e create processes in trees  e edit the structure of trees  if they also possess the right to edit the trees   see chapter 16 3 2   e edit the additional information of trees  if they also possess the right to edit the  trees  see chapter 16 3 2   e access statistics on trees  if they also possess the corresponding tree related    access rights     16 1 2  Manager  This authorization level is suitable for users and or user groups that want to use  knowledge trees in a process oriented way  This authorization level allows users and or  user groups to
218. rectory          Server   AllegroServe 1 2 24       Fig   The dialog window for uploading and linking files    Uploading and Linking Files    1  Select the word that you would like to define as a link to a file with the mouse     2  Click on the a Icon    3  Click on  Browse     4  Select the file that you want to upload and confirm this selection by clicking on   Open     5  Click on  Upload   The file will now be uploaded to the server and will then be  displayed on the right hand side of the window   Select the file by clicking on it with the left mouse button   Click on    Link Selected File     The dialog box will close and the selected word will  be displayed as a link     8  Finish by clicking on  Save  to save the text     6 6  Creating Links to Laws and Decisions    There is a Legal Database integrated in the LOGOS server  If the texts of additional  information contain references to laws or decisions  then these are automatically  recognized and linked to the corresponding entries in the Legal Database  The user can  access the respective law or decision in full text by clicking on such a link    In order for laws and decisions to be automatically recognized and correctly linked by the    system  it is necessary to observe certain standards when citing them     65      knowledgeTools    6 6 1  Citing Laws    e The first component can be either one or two section marks  8   the text    Section     or the    s     the abbreviation for section    e The next component i
219. return to the tree view           NOTE  When entering a detailed text  you must also enter a title for the text        6 3  The Text Editing Options of the Text Editor    There are a variety of available options for formatting the entered text     6 3 1  Bold Text  Select the text that you want to make bold with the mouse and then click on    the HB icon     6 3 2  Italic Text  Select the text that you want to make italic with the mouse and then click on    the    icon     6 3 3  Underlined Text    Select the text that you want to underline with the mouse and then click on the U icon     63         knowledgeTools    6 3 4  Inserting Numbering       _  Click on the    icon to insert a numbered list  Click on the same icon again to go back to    entering normal text     6 3 5  Inserting Bullets    Click on the    icon to insert a bulleted list  Click on the same icon again to go back to    entering normal text     6 3 6  Inserting Images  1  Click on the position in the text input field where you want to insert an image     Click on the icon     Click on the  Browse  button in the dialog box that opens       a    Browse through your local PC for the image file that you want to insert  select the  file by clicking on it once with the left mouse button and then click on  Open    5  Confirm your selection by clicking on the  OK  button  The image will now be    inserted into your document and uploaded to the LOGOS server     6 4  Inserting Links to Websites    You also have the op
220. rking  or attachment of a note  as a process of its own and to later retrieve it and edit it again   When you save a process  the following information is saved and may be recovered when  required    e all the assigned colour markings  True  False or Not Checked    e all the attached notes   e all the data that you have entered in the input fields of the node within the scope    of the colour marking    If you wish to terminate your work with the current process  then select the option        New     in the    Process    menu or click on the b icon in the toolbar  All of the relevant    31            knowledgeTools    process contents will be removed  logical colour markings  notes  contents of the input    fields   but they will be automatically saved with the corresponding process     2 13 2  Saving Processes Manually  If you would like to save a process for the first time  then select the    Save    option from    the    Process    menu or click on the icon in the toolbar  Enter the name that you want  to save the process as in the line labelled    Process    and confirm this action by clicking on   Save            NOTE  Please note that a process can only be saved after you have created a note or    marked the node using the logical colour marking system        2 13 3  Opening Existing Processes    1    If you want to open a saved process  then select the    Open    option from the    Process       menu or click on the    icon in the toolbar   All the processes that you h
221. rom a list of predefined  values    Multi Line Text   contrary to the    Character String    field  where any character  can be entered in the input field in a single line  in this case  any character can be  entered in a single or multi line input field   Boolean Value   instead of an alphanumeric input field  a check box is created  with the    Yes    or    No    value   Date     only a date can be entered in the input field    Time     only a time can be entered in the input field    In order to create an input field  proceed as follows     L     Select the node that you want to attach one or more input fields to by clicking on  it once in editor mode     Open the    Edit    menu and click on    Edit Input Fields     Alternatively  you can also    click on the icon in the toolbar  The    Input Fields    window will now open    Enter a name for the input field that you want to create in the input field labelled     Label      This name will later be displayed for users next to the input field     Using the    Type    shortlist  select the type of data that you want to allow when  data is entered  see above     Select the conditions under which the input field should be visible from the     Conditions    selection list  The following options are available     True        False    or     Marked     therefore either    True    or    False        Click on  Save Changes  to create the field or click  New Field  to create another    input field     One special feature is the    S
222. ront of the name of the directory    5  Click on the selection button in front of the name of the template that you want to  base the process on  The name of the selected template will now be displayed in  the upper input field  You can use this name as the name of the process or enter a  name of your own into the input field    6  Click on the  OK  button and the tree that is referred to in the process template  will open    7  You can now set the colours in the tree  enter data into input fields and or  generate documents in accordance with your own concrete working situation  Your  working results will automatically be saved in the dossier where you have created    the process     11 8 2  Creating New Processes Without Process Templates    Although it is recommended to use process templates to create processes when using the  Dossier Module  the users also have the opportunity to create processes without    templates     Save process    Please enter the name for the new process and select a dossier     Save Cancel    Fig   The    Save Process    window       Click on the    Knowledge    tab    2  Open the knowledgeTool where you want to create the process   Create a process  e g  by assigning a colour marking to a node  The    Save  Process    window will then automatically open    4  Please now enter the name that you want the process to be saved as in the input  field labelled    Name of the process       5  You can save the process in an existing dossier or create a new
223. rt by following steps  1 to 3 described above and then click on the    Configure Task    link under the impending  export task in the task window that appears  Click on the    Export Files    box next  This is  enabled in the default version and must be disabled  Please then click on the  Save     button and continue with steps 4 to 6 described above     4 10  Data Exchange  Exporting a knowledgeTool to a    KTD    File    Lexogram is an older Windows program for creating knowledgeTools  The user has the  option to import knowledgeTools that have been created with Lexogram into their LOGOS  server  Lexogram files are recognized by the filename extension     KTD       The user has the option to export knowledge trees from their server as a    KTD    file and  to then open them with Lexogram  However  due to the limitations of Lexogram  only the  tree structure is exported and not all of the additional data  e g  additional information     linked files  etc             NOTE  You must possess the    Tree Admin    administrative access right in order to be able    to perform this task              NOTE  Please note that this function is only available on servers that have an    MS Windows operating system        Click on the    Knowledge     tab    2  Click on the name of the knowledgeTool that you want to import with the right  mouse button   Select the option     Create KTD File    from the context menu that opens    4  The task window will now open  In this window  the export 
224. s     197      knowledgeTools    Administration Recipient E Mail  Backup   In this field you have the option to enter  the e mail address of a user that will be sent a message if the automatic backup fails     see further on      Dataroom Disk Quota Per User  In this field you can determine how much data  in  megabytes  you want an individual user to be able to upload to the datarooms of your    Server     Once you have finished editing the settings in the configuration window  click on the   Save  button to save your changes  You must then restart the server and the server  console for the changes to take effect   In order to do so  please proceed as follows   1  Open the    File    menu in the LOGOS server console and select the    Start   Stop  Server    option  The LOGOS server will now stop   Exit the LOGOS server console   Open the LOGOS server console again   4  Open the    File    menu in the LOGOS server console and select the    Start   Stop    Server    option  The LOGOS server will now start     18 1 3  Adding Administrators    The server console allows you to add users with the following administrative access  rights    e User Management Admin   e Tree Admin    e Laws and Decisions Admin     In order to do so  proceed as follows    1  Start the LOGOS server console if it is not already open  Open the Windows Start  menu and go to the    LOGOS    program group  Select    LOGOS Server Console    in  the    LOGOS    program group    2  Open the    Options    menu an
225. s    sign in front of the name of the  dossier  Select the process that you want to delete by clicking on the selection box in  front of the name of the process and then click on the  Delete  button  You will be asked  whether you want to delete the process  Click on  Delete  to delete the process  Click on     Cancel  if you do not want to delete the process           NOTE  If you delete a process that has earlier versions and or generated documents     then these earlier versions and documents will also be deleted        11 9  Using the Document Generator          NOTE  Please note that the method  which is described here  only applies if the Dossier    Module is installed on your server        11 9 1  System Requirements for Creating Documents    In order to use the document generator  the following system requirements must be met  by the author  as well as the user   e Operating system  MS Windows 2000  XP or Vista    e Installed Internet Explorer version 6 or later    141            knowledgeTools    Installed Flash Player version 8 or later  the standard Flash Player software  can be downloaded free of charge from the following address       http   www  adobe com shockwave download download cgi P1_Prod_Version Sh  ockwaveFlash amp promoid BIOW       Activated JavaScript  The use of JavaScript must be enabled in your browser   Accessing the LOGOS server  Your workstation must be able to access the  computer that the LOGOS server is installed on via http  The LOGOS server
226. s  then enter the name  of the user in the input field labelled    Search Term    and click on the selection  button labelled    Search for author      If you want to search for a process by using the date that it was created on  then  Start by clicking on the selection button labelled    Search by Date    and then select  the corresponding date using the selection lists   3  Click on the  Search  button to start the search     All the processes that match the search criteria that you have entered will now be  displayed in a flat list  The dossier that contains the process and the process template     on the basis of which the process was created  will be displayed next to each process     11 8 4  Opening Existing Processes    Processes may exist in several versions  edited versions   In this case  the current edited    version is displayed at the top of the list  see figure      139         knowledgeTools       w EI Dossier    LI E  Demo  j    Fig   A process with an earlier version    Earlier versions of processes are write protected  i e   if you click on the name of an  earlier version of a process  then it will be opened in the tree  however  you will not be  able to make any changes to the process   Click on the    Dossiers    tab   2  Click on  Open Dossier  to access a list of your dossiers  Open a dossier by  clicking on the    plus    sign in front of the name of the dossier   3  If necessary  click on the    plus    sign in front of the name of the process in order
227. s a figure  regulation number   If the figure also has a  lower case letter  without a space  after it  then this lower case letter is part of  the regulation number    e The last component is a character string which must fit onto a list of the laws    e In between there may be any character string  as long as it is not the same as    one of the words on the list of laws     Examples   e    167 of the BGB   Normal case  section mark s   space  regulation number   space  abbreviation of the law  e    433 subsection 1 sentence 1 of the BGB   Subsection may be abbreviated  by placing the number in bracket     1      sentence is not abbreviated    e      606   620g of the ZPO   there are no spaces for standards that contain  lower case letters    6 6 2  Citing Decisions    A decision consists of the following text components    e The first component is either one of the courts  BAG  BFH  BGH  BVerfG  BVerwG   KG  OGB  BayObLG  EGMR  or a court with an indication of place in form of    LG         OLG        FG    or    VG     and then the place name and an optional Roman numeral  In  the second case  everything together provides the name of the court    e The indication of place may contain any special characters  it is recognized only  by the separating space    e The file number is at the end  see below     e In between there may be any character string  as long as it is not the same as    one of the file numbers and does not contain a semicolon     6 6 3  Citing File Numbers  
228. s only deleted from the document  draft in the sidebar  The original text module remains in the knowledge tree     If a text module has been deleted  then an empty line is displayed instead of the text    module with the    icon at the front of the line  The note    removed    will be displayed on  the right hand side of the icon  In order to recover the deleted text module  first click      icon  The    Versions    window will    once on the corresponding line and then click on the  now open on the left hand side  Select one of the displayed versions of the text module  by clicking on the button labelled  Use This Version   The text module will now again be    displayed on the right hand side     79       knowledgeTools    Show Preview    Click on the  a  icon to show the preview of the document without separated text modules  and icons in the text     7 4  Creating a Table of Contents    The user has the option to publish the open knowledgeTool in text form  with or without  the additional information   This is done by using the    Create Table of Contents    function   The table of contents can be created as required   e in    HTML    format   e in   RTF    format  for further editing  e g  in Microsoft Word    e in    PDF    format           demo   Mozilla Firefox Jie    Datei Bearbeiten Ansicht Chronik Lesezeichen Extras Hilfe        _  knowledgeTools  _  Table of contents For demo  _  demo B             E Fertig    Server  AllegroServe 1 2 24             Fig   An exampl
229. s will be  displayed in individual tabs  You can switch between the documents by clicking on the  tabs with the mouse  The documents are displayed in a hierarchical structure in    accordance with the document structure     120          E knowledgeTools    You can navigate within the documents by clicking on the individual headings or on the    plus signs in front of the headings     In the next step  you have to define the sections of the document that you want to    attribute the link option to  A blue sls anchor icon will automatically be inserted in front    of each section of the document        Dermoscript    LJ search for page number Unlinked sections  w ALAHA    Ora Pb T    Demoscript    Lorem ipsum dolor sit amet  consetetur sadipscing elitr  sed  diam nonumy eirmod tempor invidunt ut labore et dolore  magna aliquyam erat  sed diam voluptua  4t vero eos et  accusam et justo duo dolores et ea rebum     2 xf  Stet clita kasd gubergren  no sea takimata sanctus est Lorem  ipsum dolor sit amet     3 xh     At vero eos et accusam et justo duo dolores et ea rebum  Stet  clita kasd gubergren  no sea takimata sanctus est Lorem  ipsum dolor sit amet     Part II  Part III          Fig   A document in the sidebar with an open hierarchy structure    By using these icons  you can attribute the link option to individual sections of the    document  Click on the  b anchor icon in front of the section that you want to link with    the left mouse button  The anchor icon will then chan
230. sd gubergren  no sea takimata sanctus est  Lorem ipsum dolor sit amet  p logik  pdf          Fig   The display of the search results in the sidebar    If you move the mouse pointer over the name of the file  then the properties of the file  will be displayed  including the directory in which the file was found    In order to open a file  click on the name of the file with the right mouse button and then  select the    Open    option with the left mouse button  Alternatively  you can also open the  file by double clicking it     Click on  Cancel  to return to the display of the entire dataroom     o     LOGOS Server 2 39   User   s Manual    knowledgeTools International GmbH 2008 112      knowledgeTools    10  The Script Editor    The user has the option to edit documents  which have been created in MS Word and  imported into the LOGOS server  within the application and to link them in high  resolution  in the form of so called scripts  to the nodes of a tree   In addition  you also have the option to do the following independently from MS Word    e create your own scripts directly within the application    e link individual text sections of the script to individual nodes of a tree and   e publish these scripts as    PDF    or    RTF    documents  for further processing in   MS Word     Scripts are created within a tree  however  they may also be integrated in other trees           NOTE  These functions are only available if the Dataroom Module is installed        10 1  Import
231. se    and a  value of 100 per cent is equivalent to the node being marked as    True      The user therefore also has the option to mark nodes using the usual method  as    True       or    False     by clicking on the corresponding node and then marking it by clicking on    the     or X icons in the toolbar or by selecting the corresponding options in the     Process    menu or shortcut menu  Depending on whether you have marked the node as     True    or    False     the node will now have a probability of occurrence of 100  or 0     The entry of a probability of occurrence in a node automatically generates a process     which can then be accessed again at a later time     In order to enter a probability of occurrence of 100  or 0  for a node  click on    the B icon and a window with two slider controls will open at the node  see next figure      155    E knowledgeTools    The position of the upper slider control determines the minimum probability of  occurrence  and the position of the lower slider control determines the maximum    probability of occurrence     0 100 F          m i     B  j assumption          Fig   The slider controls for entering the probability of occurrence    Both slider controls can be moved independently from each other in the window with the  mouse  In order to do so  click on the corresponding slider control with the left mouse  button and keep the mouse button pressed while you move the slider control  The  current probability of occurrence is di
232. sess the    Tree Admin    administrative access right in order to be able    to perform this task        Lexogram saves trees in two files  The first file has the filename extension     KTL     and    the second file has the same name with the filename extension     KTD     Only the file with    the    KTD    filename extension is relevant for importing     Click on the    Options    tab    Please then click on    Import KTD File       Click on the  Browse  button in the window that opens and select the directory  where the    KTD    product file that you want to import is saved  Select the  corresponding file by clicking on it with the mouse and then please click on the   Open  button    Please then click on the  Upload  button    The task window will open after the successful upload of the file  In this window   the import of the    KTD    file will be displayed as a new task that is to be executed   Please click on the P icon to start the import process  If you want to delete the  import task  then please click on the Mf icon    After the successful import  the message     Completed Successfully     will be  displayed in the task window  Click on the icon to remove the successfully  completed task from the task window    Please note that after importing a    KTD    file  you must activate the respective  users that you want to be able to access the knowledge tree that you have just    imported with the corresponding access rights in the user administration     42         k
233. sible to remove the following elements  from the user interface    e the Tab bar  Knowledge  Dossiers  Tutorials  etc     e the Toolbar    22          knowledgeTools    e the Navigation bar  e the Additional Information window at the bottom of the screen   In order to redisplay any of these elements  simply reactivate them by clicking on the    corresponding option in the    View    menu     2 7  The Search Function    By using the search function the user has the option to search for an individual node of a  tree  as well as for any additional information that might be attached to the node  There    are a variety of search options available for this purpose     2 7 1  Basic Search for Nodes    It is possible to search for the node  as well as its additional information within the open  tree     1  Open the    Navigation    menu and click on the    Search    option  Alternatively  you    can also click on the a icon in the toolbar   2  Enter your search term s  in the input field labelled    Search keys      Click on the  Search  button     Search keya    assumption    Mode colour    Al colours      drei nodes were found     Insert Delete    mie First assumption  more paths        Cu Second assumption    CI Third assumption       Fig   The    Search    window with displayed search results    The nodes that match your search criteria are displayed in the search window  see figure  above   The search window shows you how many nodes have been found that match the  search criteri
234. soft Word will now open and the document will be displayed  You can now  edit the document according to your requirements  save it locally or print it in MS  Word     Alternatively  you can also create documents on the basis of existing processes  In order  to do so  open an existing process  that belongs to a document generator knowledge    tree  and then follow the steps described above from step 3 to step 5     7 3 1  Editing Generated Documents    Generated documents can be edited in the following ways prior to exporting them to  Microsoft Word   The individual text modules of the document can be   e edited with regard to content   e deleted   e moved    or new own text modules can be added           NOTE  Changes that are made to text modules are saved in the updated process and can  therefore be accessed at any time  However  the changes do not have an effect on the    original text modules of the knowledge tree        As described above  the text modules of nodes  which have been marked as    True    or     False    during the assigning of the colour marking  are added and listed under each other    in the sidebar on the right hand side of the screen     7          knowledgeTools    E Decument Cemo           Lorem ipsum dolor sit amet  consetetur sadipscing elitr  sed diam  nonumy eirmod tempor invidunt ut labore et dolore magna  aliquyam erat  sed diam voluptua     d  22  First assumption    Stet clita kasd gubergren  no sea takimata sanctus est Lorem    ipsum dolor s
235. splayed on the left of the node next to the  red green area  If you move both slider controls  then you will see how the values    change     30  he        lusion i x   m a4       Fig   A node with a set probability of occurrence    By moving both slider controls  you can enter a range of possible values  in this example     the range is from 60  to 90    You can also enter an exact value     LOGOS Server 2 39   User   s Manual    knowledgeTools International GmbH 2008 156    E knowledgeTools    You also have the option to set the two slider controls so that they can be moved  together  In order to do so  click on the red green area between the two slider controls  and both slider controls will then be fixed  Alternatively  you can also click on the centre    icon       of the three icons on the left hand side of the window     a0     d assumption       Fig   The input window with fixed slider controls    If the upper and lower triangles of the icon are aligned  x   then the slider controls are    fixed  If you click on the icon again  then the fix will be cancelled     The probability of occurrence that is entered in the window will be displayed by the  coloured bar on the left hand side of the node  When you enter a probability  you will be    able to see how the corresponding bar of the parent node changes           NOTE  Please note that probabilities of occurrence in trees can only be set from right to  left  This also means that it is no longer possible to enter probabi
236. sregierung vom 25  September 1997  BTDrucks  13 8587 5  45  wird   im Einklang mit dem eben Gesagten    zur Abgrenzung zum  Beisichflhren  einer Waffe auf die bisherige Rechtsprechung des Bundesgerichtshofs hingewiesen   Der Entwurf geht davon  aus  daB der Tater die SchuBwaffe schon dann    bei der Tat    verwendet  wenn er sie zur Drohung mit Gewalt einsetzt  vgl  BGHSt 26  176  180 zu     113 Abs  2 Satz 2 Nr  1             E Fertig    Fig   The display of a decision in the Legal Database    8 2 2  Accessing Decisions in a knowledgeTool    Please click on the corresponding entry in order to view a decision that is listed in the     Library    window in full text  The currently open tree will now be minimized and the full  text of the corresponding decision will be displayed  Click on the minimized display of the    tree to return to the knowledge tree     8 3  Entering Decisions in the Legal Database    Users can also enter laws and decisions in the database themselves  This can be done by    using the web based editor   87      knowledgeTools          NOTE  In order to be able to edit laws and decisions  you must be authorized to do so as    a    Laws and Decisions Editor    in the user administration        8 3 1     Adding Courts    Decisions can only be added to a court that already exists in the database  Therefore     prior to entering a decision  you must either select an existing court or add a new court    to the database     8 3 2     Adding Decisions to an Exist
237. ss TemplateS           ssssssssnnsrrnnrnrsrrnrrrrnnrrrnrerrnrerenns 135  11 7  Working With DossierS            sssssssssssssesssnssssnssnsnesnssronesrsnnnesnsnesnsnennesenne 135  Liezl Catino New DOSSIOrS since im egiee ccc inst ELTETE Ee KEN LERLE ARIETES EIEE 135  11 7 2  Searching Existing Dossiers           ssssssssssssssrsnsssnnesnnnesnsnennsnsensnrnnesenne 135  11 7 3  Editing or Deleting Existing DossS  erS           sssssssrsrsnrsrrnnsrenrrrrnrenrnnrerenns 136  174s Activating Dossier Contents sicctrcsclaxcunmnniecaveciieiatentiuneren Ena 136  11 8  Working With ProceSSeS           sssssssssssenessonssnnnssnsnssnsnsnnesronesnnnesnsnsnennenrnne 137  11 8 1  Creating New Processes on the Basis of Process Templates    137  11 8 2  Creating New Processes Without Process Templates             cccceeeeeeeeees 138  11 8 3  Searching for Existing Processes            sssssssesreresrrsrrerrsrrerrerrerrerrerrenre 139  11 8 4  Opening Existing ProCeSSES isrireernririnr reiini n i aa 139  11 8 5  Editing and Versioning of Processes          ccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeueueueueuuauaaags 140  11 5 6  AcCtvVating Pr  CESS  S nrar E E EETA 140  LLO  COPYING Proce SES reris ara E AAEE EE EEEE 141  11 8  68   Deleting PROCS SSCS peio a E E E E 141  11 9  Using the Document Generator           sssssssssssssssssnesronsssnnesnnnesnsnennsnennenenne 141  11 9 1  System Requirements for Creating DocumentsS          ssssssssrsrssrsresrrrren 141  11 9 2  Using the Document Generator          ssss
238. ss read access to the knowledgeTools that are referred to in the tutorial or not   The list of available tutorials displays the name of the tutorial  as well as the technical  name of the knowledgeTool that is referred to and the date that the tutorial was last    changed  Click on the name of a tutorial to start the tutorial     S knowledgeTools   Mozilla Firefox m   m     Datei Bearbeiten Ansicht Chronik Lesezeichen Extras Hilfe    Start Dossiers Knowledge Tutorials Datarooms Reporting Templates Options A amp D Users    Process Edit Scripts view Navigation Help  YX   sEWOOQ  i  T0  1 First assumption    demo   version 40    v      gt    0  os oo     Third assumption          Fig   A tutorial    The tutorial is displayed using the normal user interface of the knowledgeTools client   A video player appears on the right hand side of the screen and displays the video that is  associated with the tutorial  The video player window can be moved with the help of the  mouse and minimized by clicking on the minimize button   _   at the top right hand  corner of the window    The elapsed time is displayed next to the total time of the video  and tutorial  below the  actual video    You have the option to pause the tutorial by clicking on the I   button and to continue    playing the tutorial by clicking on the  gt   button        knowledgeTools    If you click on the button  then the volume of the video will be muted  If you click on  the button again  then the default volume of the v
239. ssssssrnrsrrnnsrrnrrrenrrrenrerrnnrrrnnerenn 96  The Dataroom Module   sisisisisrsisssisrsisisinesasisadiea naana 97   9 1  Fe Dal IOON veaveacriee cei tderesta ETEA EAEE 97  9 2  Dataroom Management 2czceceue ten acawte oe Ania sabeny E N NTAN LIREN D 97  9 2 1  Creating and Editing Directories           ssssssssssssrsnrsrsnrsrrnrrrenrrrrnnerrnrerenn 97  9 2 2  Uploading Individual FileS            ccccccceeeceeeeeessccceesseneeeeeeeesseeeeguennnannegs 97  9 2 3  Uploading Multiple FICS viiisectanncneses susuadenamanawas oeae ve ve tevenavan apnea bcraneNaneas 98  9 2 4  Editing Files  Moving  Copying  Renaming and Deleting               cceeeeeeee 99  9 2 5  DElGUING Directories sccivisccansnncopeceaders navandennasasaes vernadvnvavanaagnasancenveseas 100  9 2 6  Configuring INGEXIING  ax incvacmetsuedereaneacencasuannn eauetnecunnianenneleocouransents 100  9 2 7  Maex FUGE renarena re ATEEN EAEE AEAEE 101  9 2 8  Deleting DataroOM Serisinin ninnan rT NENEN EENE ani 102  9 3  Navigation in the DataroOM       s  ssssssssssssrsnrsrrnrsrenrerenrrrrnrerenrrrrnnrnrenrnrenne 103  9 3 1  FUPICUING FOS semcagaececeugaevaameace uaoanr ener siaueutn arp ianenncounn inane amnncorenatacenys 104  9 4  Using Dataroom Files in Trees        ssssssssssssnnnssnsnssnsnsnnssronensnnssnnnesnrnesnsnene 107  9 4 1  FS   niiata SS E E A T A EET ETT 109  9 4 2  Downloading Datarooms or DIreCtOrie   S        ccccccccceeeeeee seen ee eeeeeeeeeeeaaaes 109  9 4 3  Displaying and Hiding the Sidebar     
240. stion is included in the database   This function is only available if you possess  the corresponding licence on your server    Weight   By using colour markings  green  red or yellow   nodes can be marked  according to their level of importance    Suppress window    Delete Process Node       This suppresses the warning  message when moving a node referred to by a process in the published version of  the same tree    Suppress Display of Computed Data   This suppresses the display of the  colour values of the parent nodes  if a colour marking has been set on a child  node    Input Fields   This function provides the option to assign the individual nodes of  the tree with input fields that can be used for the collection of data and statistical  analysis at a later stage or within the scope of document generation    Calculation Fields   If this option is enabled  then you have the option to use  the calculator function in the knowledge trees  This function is only available if  you possess the corresponding licence on your server    Strict colors   If the force colour marking option is selected  then the user can  only mark the child node as    True    or    False       Bivalent Logic   If this option is selected  then the user can only mark the nodes  as    True    or    Not Checked     In this case the    False    option is not available  The  two valued logic is particularly useful in the case of trees that illustrate a  sequence of processes  Please note that this option is 
241. t are displayed in the sidebar are the files that are in the dataroom  the same  restrictions apply for a full text search in the sidebar as for a search in the dataroom   password protected or other unreadable documents cannot be searched for  only the file  types listed above in chapter 9 2 2 can be searched   1  Click on the    Files    tab  if it is not yet open    2  Select the dataroom or directory that you want to search by clicking on the name  of the dataroom or directory with the left mouse button   Enter the search term in the input field   4  Select whether you want to search for the filename or in the files  by clicking on  the corresponding selection button     5  Click on    Search        After the search has been completed  the number of search results  as well as a list of all    the files that were found will be displayed in a list     E knowledgeTools    knowledgeTools   Mozilla Firefox  Datei Bearbeiten Ansicht Chronik Lesezeichen Extras Hilfe    Dossiers Knowledge Tutorials Datarooms Reporting Templates Options    Process Edit Scripts View Navigation Help Demo    BOAaYxX 7 B8  8FWOOaRs       T00 E Document   2 Second assumption   i  TERS A a knowledgetools    demo   version 32  O Search for names    Search in files                Found data  2       logik pdf  First assumption ae  todo doc    Conclusion Second assumption    Third assumption    Fes ote od module  true  Z Pm      t vero eos et accusam et justo duo dolores et ea rebum    Files  Stet clita ka
242. t be met  Firstly  the basic  technical requirements for generating documents  as described earlier on  must be met   In addition  the template     ktoo s dot    must be installed in the template directory of all  the workstations being used by the users  In order to do so  proceed as follows    1  Open Microsoft Word on the workstation  Please note that when doing so  you  Should use the user   s normal access and not the administrator access  unless of  course the user and the administrator are one and the same person     2  Open the    Tools    menu in Word and select    Options       Click on the    File Locations    tab in the window that appears    A list of file locations for different file types will be displayed  Click on the line  labelled    User templates     The directory  where the Word templates of the current  user are saved  will be displayed on the right  next to    User templates     Usually   the directory is       C  Documents and Settings User Application Data Microsoft Templates       Make a note of the directory  this is the user template directory    5  The template     ktoo s dot    is on the installation CD of the LOGOS server console   Copy the template     ktoo s dot     to the user template directory     6  The installation of the    ktoo s dot    template is now complete     130         knowledgeTools          NOTE  Depending on the configuration of your computer  the user template directory  may not be visible in Windows Explorer  In this case 
243. t edited version of the  knowledgeTool in normal mode  A preview of how the knowledgeToo l would look  to users if it was to be displayed at that time will be displayed    e Open Published Version  this option displays the published version of the  knowledgeTool in normal mode    When you are in the    Display Preview    or    Open Published Version    views  you can switch  back to editor mode at any time by opening the    Navigation    menu and clicking on the       Open Structure Editor    option     5 20  Deleting Knowledge Trees          NOTE  This function is only available if you possess the    Tree Admin    administrative  access right and also have at least read access to the knowledge tree that you want to    delete              NOTE  Please note that if you delete a knowledge tree  you will also delete all of the  processes and templates that relate to the knowledge tree  However  you will be    informed of which processes and templates would be deleted        59                knowledgeTools    In order to delete a knowledge tree  proceed as follows     i  2     5 21     Click on the    Knowledge    tab    Click on the name of the knowledge tree that you want to delete with the right  mouse button and select the    Delete       option from the shortcut menu that  opens  Alternatively  you can also click on the Lx  icon in front of the name of the  knowledge tree    A window will appear and you will be asked whether you really want to delete the  selected knowledge
244. t is possible to configure the system in a way that either  all of the contributions to all  the discussions for all the forums of all the nodes of a tree are displayed at the same  time  or that only those contributions to discussions that relate to the forum for the    currently selected node are displayed           NOTE  In order to use the forum function  the    Discussion Forum    option must be    activated in the technical properties of the tree in question        27          E knowledgeTools    All articles  All articles       El 2007 11 21 John Doe Test Author  John Doe  Date  2007 11 21  Subject  Test  This article refers to the following node  First assumption  2        Hello world                  Compose reply                Create new article Delete article Cancel    Fig   The    Forum    window       2 12 1  Creating New Contributions for the Forum    1  Select a node by clicking on it with the mouse     2  Open the    Edit    menu in the main menu and click on the    Create article    option     Alternatively  you also have the option to click on the   g icon in the toolbar   Enter a relevant subject into the input field labelled    Topic      4  Enter your contribution in the input field below   When you are finished  click on  Send   The contribution to the forum has now    been created and will be displayed on the left hand side of the forum window     Hew article   Mew post at node   First assumption  2   Subject    pT    Contents        Fig   The    New F
245. t more than one script  then select the additional scripts using the  Same method    Next  click on the  Export  button    The task window will now open  In this window  the export of the script will be  displayed as a new task that is to be executed  Please click on the P icon to start  the export process  If you want to delete the export task  then please click on  the M icon    After the successful export  the message     Completed Successfully     will be  displayed in the task window    Click on the O icon to download the exported script  Please note that if you export  several scripts at the same time  only one file will be created    Please then click on the icon to remove the successfully completed task from    the task window     45         knowledgeTools    4 7  Data Exchange  Exporting Datarooms    If the Dataroom Module is activated on your LOGOS server  then you have the option to  export the datarooms on your server  e g  to import them to other servers  When they  are exported  datarooms are exported to a product file  recognized by the    KIP    filename  extension   Please note that  depending on the quantity of data in and the size of the  dataroom  this file may possibly require between several hundred megabytes and several    gigabytes           NOTE  You must possess the    Tree Admin    administrative access right in order to be able    to perform this task        Click on the    Datarooms    tab    Select the dataroom that you want to export by clicking
246. t of the window contains the qualified problem report  You can send this  report to knowledgeTools by e mail  In order to do so  click on the  Send  button  It is  always helpful  if you can also enter the precise working situation  in which the problem  that you are reporting occurred  in the input field labelled    Your Comment     therefore it  is essential that you complete this field prior to sending the report    You will receive confirmation when the report has been successfully sent  If you are  unable to send the report  then please copy the text from the upper part of the window    and send it to knowledgeTools at a later time     210       knowledgeTools    20  Final Note    LOGOS is continuously being developed and improved  Please note that individual    functions may consequently change within the scope of updates or upgrades     In the event of any technical queries or problems  please do not hesitate to contact our    technical support by e mail at support knowledgetools de     211    
247. tension      knowledgetools dms     After doing so  your address should read as follows      http   address_of_the_server knowledgetools dms       Click on the  OK  button    Close the window by clicking on the  OK  button           NOTE  If you are using Internet Explorer 7  make sure that the security level for the       Trusted sites    is set at    Low                 NOTE  If the Dossier Module is installed on your LOGOS server  then you must create  process and layout templates in order create documents with specified layouts  In  addition  it is necessary to install the    ktools dot    template in the user template directory  of each workstation  Further information on this topic is available in the chapter on the       The Dossier Module           7 1 1  Using the Document Generator    When using this application type it is possible to assign two text modules to each node of  the tree in the Structure Editor using the logical colour marking system  one text module  for cases where the node in question has been marked as    True     green  and one text  module for cases where the node has been marked as    False     red     In addition  it is also possible to assign input fields to these text modules  where the user  can later enter certain process related data when analysing the respective node    The actual generation of documents occurs in normal mode   document generation is not  possible in structure editor mode    The document    builds    itself up dynamically 
248. ternative text  justo duo dolores et ea rebum     Second assumption Colour   E     Weight  x OG             Logical conjunction     Third assumption 5  A          Fig   The display of the search results in the sidebar    10 6 5  Exporting Scripts as    PDF    and    RTF    Files    You have the option to export your scripts as    PDF    or    RTF    documents for viewing and  further processing in MS Word  When a script is exported  the structure of the script is  also exported  therefore  when the created    PDF    document is displayed in Acrobat  Reader  it already contains a table of contents  In MS Word  the section headings of the  created document are assigned the format headings    Heading 1    to    Heading x       A script may be exported at any time  If there are several scripts integrated within a  tree  then click on the name of the corresponding script  Open the    Scripts    menu in the  main menu and select the required export format from the two available menu options      Create Word Document  RTF     or    Create Print Version  PDF      The created document    will be displayed in a new browser window     125      knowledgeTools    10 6 6  Deleting Scripts          NOTE     You must possess the    Tree Admin    administrative access right in order to be able    to perform this task              NOTE     Please note that the script that you want to delete may be linked in several    knowledgeTools on your server  This may also be the case with knowledgeTools
249. text modules you want to edit by clicking on it with the    mouse and then click on the   icon at the top right hand corner of the  respective tab    3  You can now enter the text of your choice  However  this step is optional and the  input fields can also be used without any additional text     4  Click on the position in the text where you want to insert the input field with the    mouse and click on the icon in the toolbar    5  The names  labels  of all the input fields that are available for the selected node   will now be displayed in the selection list that appears  In addition  the master  data fields of your dossiers will also be displayed  you have the option to integrate  these into the text as well  also refer to chapter 8 1 5 below     6  Select one of the input fields by clicking on it with the mouse  The input field will  now be integrated into the text     7  Click on  Save  to save the text module     Of course  it is also possible to insert more than one input field into a text module  In  order to do so  simply repeat steps 4 and 5    Nodes that have input fields for document generation in their text modules are indicated  by the presence of a small blue icon at the bottom right hand corner of the node  If you  move the mouse pointer over this icon  then the title of the input field will be displayed   In addition  the title will be coloured green or red to display which text module the field    belongs to  green      True    or red      False         7 1 
250. th a corresponding message    If you want to see where in the tree the node that is associated with an input field is  located  then click on  Show Node  on the right  above the input field  The tree will then    be moved within the window so that the node is visible     3 knowledgeTools   Mozilla Firefox oes    Datei Bearbeiten Ansicht Chronik Lesezeichen Extras Hilfe    Start Dossiers Knowledge Tutorials Datarooms Reporting Templates Options A amp D Users  Process Edit Scripts view Navigation Help  AODYX  B  s FWOOaASs    amp   AGO  4 First assumption   gt   i  demo   demo    heitkam atsolute com     Version 25    Input field 1     Input field 2     aoe aiii aaa  ry    Third assumption          E Ubertrage Daten von localhost       Fig   The sidebar displays all the activated document fields of a path    11 10  Document Generation    The generation of documents occurs in normal mode  not in structure editor mode  on  the basis of assigning a colour marking  i e  a process  In order to create a document     proceed as follows     146      knowledgeTools    Open a knowledge tree that has been prepared for document creation in normal  mode    Assign the colour marking  i e  mark the node as    True    or    False    depending on  your working situation  A sidebar will open on the right hand side of the screen  in  which the text modules that are associated with the node  where the colour  marking has been assigned  will be displayed  This also serves as a preview of the  struc
251. the    Open    option in the shortcut menu with the left    mouse button  Alternatively  you can also open the file by double clicking it     9 4 2  Downloading Datarooms or Directories    The user has the option to download the individual directories of a dataroom including all  of the files that they contain  or to download entire datarooms  including all of the  directories and files that they contain  as a    ZIP    file  In order to do so  proceed as  follows   1  Select the corresponding directory or the corresponding dataroom by clicking on it  with the mouse   Open the    File    menu and select the option     Download as ZIP File      3  The task window will now open  In this window  the download of the dataroom or  the directory will be displayed as a new task that is to be executed  Please click on  the    icon to start the download process  If you want to delete the task  then    please click on the Wl icon     109       knowledgeTools    4  After the successful download  the message     Completed Successfully     will be  displayed in the task window  Click on the icon to save the    ZIP    file on your  computer    5  Please then click on the icon to remove the successfully completed task from    the task window     9 4 3  Displaying and Hiding the Sidebar    You can display or hide the sidebar according to your requirements  Click on the  X  at  the top right hand corner to close the sidebar     Open the    View    menu and click on the    Sidebar    option to 
252. the    Technical Tree Properties    window   3  Select the node where you want to attach one or more text modules to by clicking  on it once with the left mouse button   4  At the bottom of the screen  you will see two tabs labelled    Text Module  True        and    Text Module  False      Select which of the two text modules you want to edit    by clicking on it with the mouse and then click on the Ej icon at the top  right hand corner of the respective tab     5  Enter the required text and click on  Save      7 1 3  Integrating Input Fields    The user has the option to define input fields for every single node and to integrate these  in the text modules  The data which is later entered into the input fields by users is then  included in the generated document  Please note that the input fields are only available  at the node where they have been created and not throughout the entire tree   The integration of input fields occurs in two steps    1  Define the input fields that should generally be available at a node     2  Integrate one or more of these input fields in a text module of the node           NOTE  The creation of input fields is described in chapter 7 2        71         knowledgeTools    In order to integrate an input field that has already been created in a text module    proceed as follows    1  Open the tree that you want to edit and select the node that contains the text  modules where you want to integrate the input fields     2  Select which of the two 
253. the T OC vacananannatmeacnsaaisnanadisnane ER a a 18  2 4 1  MOVING tHE TCG prirni E E E 19  2 4 2  Moving the Tree Using the Mouse Scroll Wheel             ccccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 19  2 4 3  Additional Navigation Options        s  sessssssssssssnnsrsnrsrrnnsrrnnsnenrnnenrrrrnrrrene 19  2 4 4  Synopsis  Node IDs and Node Paths           ccccceee cece ee eee eeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeneas 20  A  VENNO COINS arane E E EA 21  Zod The Presentation MOGE sessirrnsecerere i ernea Ee Eo 21  PR A USING the Zoom FUnNCHO arosine a a A E RO 21  2 6  Additional VIEWING  OPTIONS sicsisivisiacsicisinanacanncarsacnnsaianeaweadonadanhiaamiardipmndsobiaaiiuues 21  2 6 1  Changing the User Interface Language                cccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 21  2 6 2  Displaying the Current Editor of a knowledgeTool          cc cece cece eeeeeeeeeneeees 22  2 6 3  Switching Between Normal Mode and Editor MOde         ccccceseeeeeeeeeeeeeees 22  2 6 4  Adding and Removing the Elements of the User Interface              ccceeee  22  Zid MACS CARCI FUNCIO aenn E E E E E a 23  2   1  Basic Search for NOGES  cccatccenccacaeendan taeeusendonansashansanioneeantaonbeteastedeccates 23  2 7 2  Adv      ced Search OpON S vasisonesannrarcetercaiuaanssiancsee naa yacsneaaueaeane wines 24  2 8  Additional INTOMMAUON assonans erer rE aaia 25  2 9  Using the Logical Colour Marking System         ss sessssssssrsrsnrsrrnrrrenrnnsrrerenrrnne 25  2 00  LOCKEA NOUG G onner r E E E E EA 26  Zella PECAN GAI C EE T EA A AT
254. the additional information texts   e upload files to the tree and link them to the additional information texts   e assign datarooms to the tree   e assign sidebar documents to the tree   e create and remove links between the nodes of the tree and files from linked   datarooms  e create and remove links between the nodes of the tree and text sections from    linked documents    Users that possess the    Manager    global access right  as well as the right to edit a tree   are able to perform the following actions in the tree    e create  edit and delete the additional information texts   e upload files to the tree and link them to the additional information texts   e create and remove links between the nodes of the tree and files from linked    datarooms    16 3 3  Process Analysis Access    There are three different types of analyses that are available for the trees   e the analysis of created processes  e the graphical process analysis  e the raw data analysis    These analyses are described further on in the User   s Manual     182       knowledgeTools    16 4  Special Access Rights When Using Add On Modules    If you are using the following add on modules on your LOGOS server  e Dataroom Module  e Dossier Module  e Tutorial Module  then there are also certain restrictions with regard to their use depending on the access    rights of the individual users     16 4 1  Special Access Rights When Using the Dataroom Module    Tree Admin  If the Dataroom Module is installed  the
255. the average     Process analysis chart    Processes Forerage probability    50 Bo va a0 90 100  Probability in         Fig   The diagram illustrating the probability of occurrence    The vertical    Processes    axis displays the number of existing processes numbered from 1  upwards  therefore  there are three processes in the example above     In addition to the number of each process  the horizontal axis displays the probability of  occurrence that has been entered  or respectively  calculated for the corresponding    process in the node  In the case of an exact probability value  e g  85    the value is    192         knowledgeTools    displayed as a single dot  The value can be derived from the horizontal    Probability of  Occurrence in      axis  If  instead of an exact value  a range of possible values has been  entered  e g  80  to 85    then these values will be displayed as two dots that are  connected by a line  The red dot represents the minimum probability value and the green  dot represents the maximum probability value  If you move the mouse pointer over the  dots  then the precise values will be displayed in a yellow tooltip    A vertical grey bar displays the average probability of occurrence that has been    calculated from the values of the individual processes     17 3 2  Displaying the Average Expected Value   Click on the    Expected Values Diagram    icon in the    Process Analysis    window in order to  open the diagram  The diagram displays both the a
256. the following ways prior to exporting publishing    then in Microsoft Word     The individual text modules of the document can be    edited with regard to content  deleted    moved    or new own text modules can be added     As described above  the text modules of nodes  which have been marked as    True    or       False    during the assigning of the colour marking  are added and listed under each other    in the sidebar on the right hand side of the screen     147       knowledgeTools    Dokument demo       Lorem ipsum dolor sit amet  consectetuer adipiscing elit  Nunc  eras  Praesent non odio at erat consectetuer mollis  Praesent  lacinia sagittis quam  Curabitur ornare vulputate risus  Morbi  sapien nulla  tincidunt sit amet  mollis ac  iaculis a  nunc  Mung  luctus libero in nulla     de n2  Erster Enoten    Quisque vel lorem condimentum justo hendrerit dictum  Aenean  mollis condimentum augue  Sed ut est  Cras velit  Vivamus  ultricies  Quisque malesuada dapibus erat  Nam suscipit  pede  nec volutpat tempus  risus dolor accumsan ipsum  non tristique  tellus est et ante  Sed et mauris varius tortor luctus vulputate   Pellentesque habitant morbi tristique senectus et netus et  malesuada fames ac turpis egestas          Suspendisse porta mollis felis  Cras vitae dui a nisi mollis  tempus  Suspendisse potenti  Donec mattis velit eget libero   Etiam eget neque sit amet lacus iaculis aliquam  Ut convallis  nibh sit amet magna  Integer augue  Aliquam leo pede  aliquet  ut  fr
257. then be used for additional calculations  Alternatively  you can also  enter a formula in the field  Please refer to the calculation operations and  functions further on in the User   s Manual     If this is the case  then users will not be able to enter anything in the field in the  published version of the knowledgeTool and the field will be used solely to output    the result of the calculation formula     164      knowledgeTools    In order to save a formula field that you have created  as well as the contents of the     Description    and    Formula    fields  click on the  Save  button at the top right hand    corner of the sidebar     Click on the iF icon to create another new formula field or click on the T icon in front of    the name of the formula field to delete it     13 2  Possible Calculation Operations and Functions    In structure editor mode  you can enter formulas and numerical values in fields  as well  as field names of other fields  that can be used in subsequent calculations  You are    allowed to use brackets in the formulas     13 2 1  Numerical Values    Numerical values can be entered as follows   e 123  e  123  e 123 00  decimal point     13 2 2  Field Names    Calculation fields  of the actual node or another node  can be included in a calculation by  stating the field name    Example  A1 82  adds the entered numerical value in field A1 to the entered numerical  value field B2     13 2 3  Possible Calculation Operations and Notation    The followi
258. thout having to re enter all the  data     9 4  Using Dataroom Files in Trees    Trees that have been configured accordingly also have an additional sidebar on the  right hand side of the screen  The files of a dataroom that are assigned to a tree will be  displayed in this sidebar  These files can be linked in the highest resolution to the  individual nodes of the tree displayed on the left hand side    At the top of the sidebar  there are tabs describing the different datarooms  you can  switch between the different contents by clicking on the tabs with the mouse  The active    tab is always green        S knowledge Tools   Mozilla Firefox   7   o E    Datei Bearbeiten Ansicht Chronik Lesezeichen Extras Hilfe    Start Dossiers Knowledge Tutorials Datarooms Reporting Templates Options A amp D    Process Edit Scripts View Navigation Help  BOVYX 7 B e8 FAWOORS   a  AGO  f coneuson 5     demo   Yersion 32             Nirectory 4  First assumption  5 fonts doc      logik pdf  todo doc    BD Directory B       433 BGB Acts     242 StGB     5  5 433 BGB  5     242 StGB          Fig   The sidebar    The individual nodes of the tree can be linked to individual files in the sidebar  In this    case  a file can be linked to several nodes at the same time     107    E knowledgeTools    If a node is linked to a file  then the   l icon will be displayed at the bottom right hand  corner of the node  In addition  the name of the file will be displayed in the    Library     window at the bot
259. tion    and    Library    windows will be displayed with  additional information   Standard   Details   the    Explanation        Details        Practice    and    Library     windows will be displayed with additional information   Document Generator   in addition to the    Explanation    and    Library    windows   the text modules for the generation of documents will also be displayed   see also    Advanced Functions    below   This function is only available if you  possess the corresponding licence on your server    Risk Analysis   if this application type is activated  then the additional  information windows     Explanation    and    Library     will be displayed  In addition  it  is also possible to enter and calculate probabilities and expected values when  using this application type  This function is only available if you possess the    corresponding licence on your server     Optional Features    This determines whether the technical functions that are listed below are available in the    client or respectively  the tree     Send Comments as e mail to   Users can send commentaries from the  knowledgeTool on contents or technical problems via e mail to a predetermined  recipient  activate the option and then enter the e mail address of the recipient   In order to use the    Send Comment    function  there must be a mail server  configured in the    Server Options    under    Options    in the LOGOS server console   knowledgeTools logic   The user can analyse the kno
260. tion to define a word within a text as a link to a website  This link  will then appear both within the running text and in the    Library    window     1  Select the word that you want to define as a hyperlink with the mouse     2  Click on the icon    3  Enter the address  URL  of the website that you want to insert a link to in the field  labelled    URL       4  Optionally  you can also enter a text in the field labelled    Tooltip     This text will  then be displayed when the user moves the mouse pointer over the link     5  Save the information you that have entered by clicking on the  OK  button     6 5  Inserting Links to Files    You also have the option to define a word within a text as a link to a file  This link will  then appear both within the running text and in the    Library    window  In order to do this   the file in question must first be uploaded to the LOGOS server  This ensures that when  your knowledgeTool is transferred to another LOGOS server installation  the linked file    will also be transferred     64    E knowledgeTools      Insert file   Mozilla Firefox BAX    Datei Bearbeiten Ansicht Chronik Lesezeichen Extras Hilfe          L  knowledgeTools     _  Insert file          Your computer    Choose a file from your local computer to upload it to the server     Ihr LOGOS Server  4             D fonts  pdf  test zip                                              New folder    Rename file    Open this file  5 Rename folder    Delete file     Delete di
261. tivated for all users  the files that they contain are only    visible to other users if you have explicitly activated them     1   2   cf    Click on the    Dossiers    tab    Click on  Open Dossier  to access a list of your dossiers    Open a dossier by clicking on the    plus    sign in front of the name of the dossier   Select the note that you want to activate by clicking on the selection box in front  of the name of the note    Click on the  Clear  button below to activate the note  In addition  the name of  the note will be highlighted in red  so that you and other users will be able to    quickly recognize the newly activated note     11 12 4  Deleting Notes    Click on the    Dossiers    tab    Click on  Open Dossier  to access a list of your dossiers    Open a dossier by clicking on the    plus    sign in front of the name of the dossier   Select the note that you want to delete by clicking on the selection box in front of  the name of the note    Click on the  Delete  button below  Before deletion  you will be asked to confirm  whether you want to delete the note  Click on  Delete  to delete the note  Click on     Cancel  if you do not want to delete the note     153      knowledgeTools    12  Risk Analysis Using knowledgeTools    knowledgeTools that have the application type     Risk Analysis     activated  allow users to  calculate the probabilities of occurrence of the events that are illustrated in the node in  accordance with the logical structure  Nodes  or r
262. tly  in the same way as a law  or to access them from a knowledgeTool     8 2 1  Viewing Decisions in the Database    Click on the    A amp D    tab at the top of the screen and then on the selection list labelled     Please Select Court     Select a court from the list in order to display all the decisions that  exist on the server from the court in question and then click on the  Display  button  If  there are decisions from the selected court  then these will be sorted according to file  numbers  Click on the file number of a decision to access the text of the corresponding    decision     3 knowledgeTools   Mozilla Firefox Jes    Datei Bearbeiten Ansicht Chronik Lesezeichen Extras Hilfe    Start Dossiers Knowledge Tutorials Datarooms Reporting Templates Options ARD    Acts and decisions     Acts and decisions P  Show all acts    Decisions    by court  Please select cout m  Show Edit Delete    by file number              Fig   The start page of the Legal Database    Alternatively  you can also search for a decision directly  In order to do so  enter the file  number of the decision in the input field under the selection list and then click on the   Display  button on the right  next to the input field   A decision in the Legal Database may contain the following elements    e Keywords   e Norms    e Official Headnote    86         knowledgeTools    e Editorial Headnote   e Operative Provisions   e Facts of the Case   e Reasons for the Decision   e Sources   e Lower   Higher
263. to dynamically generate documents on the basis of these processes    By using the Dossier Module  users have the option to create dossiers on the server for  customers or projects  to assign master data  e g  contact details  to these dossiers and  to save their results  i e  processes and generated documents  in these dossiers   Furthermore  users also have the option to store other files  e g  Word documents  Excel  charts  presentations or graphics in the dossiers    Besides the tiered system for the administration of access rights  the Dossier Module also  has an activation system  In the default version  dossier contents are only visible to  and  can only be used by  the user that has created them  However  it is also possible to  activate some or all dossiers for editing and processing by other users     In order to use the Dossier Module  you require the corresponding licence     2 2 6  The Risk Analysis Module    knowledgeTools that have the application type     Risk Analysis     activated  allow users to  calculate the probabilities of occurrence of the events that are illustrated in the tree in  accordance with the logical structure  Nodes can no longer only be marked as    True    or     False     but may now alternatively be assigned a probability of occurrence between 0   and 100   which can be used in the calculation of the overall probability of occurrence   Each individual node may also optionally have a value in EUR        USD     or GBP        The expected v
264. to edit by clicking on it once with the mouse and    then click on the Ej icon  An editing window will open  Edit the text as required and then  click on the  Save  to apply your changes  Please note that these changes will only have  an effect on the text module in the document draft in the sidebar  The original text of the  text module in the knowledge tree will remain unchanged     Text modules that have been edited in this way will be marked accordingly  The note       adapted    will be displayed on the right of the    icon on the first line of the text module   You also have the option to undo changes to the text modules  In order to do so  select      icon    the text module in question by clicking on it with the mouse and then click on the  in the sidebar    The    Versions    window will now open on the left hand side of the screen  All the edited  versions of the text module will be displayed in the window  Select an edited version by  clicking on the button labelled  Use This Version   This version will now again be    displayed in the sidebar on the right hand side of the screen     Inserting New Text Modules  In addition to the text modules that have been integrated in the document as a result of  the colour marking being assigned  you can also insert your own text modules     1  In order to do so  select the text module in the sidebar under which the new text    module should be inserted and click on the A icon     2  A new empty line will appear with the    ico
265. to link in the input  fields labelled    Regex    and    Format String of the Files     Please contact knowledgeTools    directly for the necessary information     116       knowledgeTools    10 4  Editing Existing Scripts    10 4 1  Editing Sections and Text Blocks    You have the option to edit existing section headings and text blocks   1  Select the element that you want to edit  section or text block  by clicking on it    with the mouse     2  Click on the 4 icon and a window will open on the left  next to the sidebar  You  can change the contents of the element in this window     3  Finish by clicking on the  Save  button to save your changes     10 4 2  Moving Elements    You have the option to move text blocks vertically within a section or to move entire  sections within a script vertically and horizontally  When you move a section  the  Subordinate elements  i e  sections and text blocks  are a ways moved with it    Select the element  section or text block  that you want to move by clicking on it with  the mouse  the element will now be highlighted  You can now move the element up or    Ww    down by clicking on the   or icons  If it is no longer possible to move an element up    or down  then the corresponding icon will be disabled  By using the d or P icons  you  can move sections horizontally  When a section is moved horizontally  this is equivalent  to being moved one level down  move to the right  or one level up  move to the left  in  the hierarchy of the str
266. tom of the screen    If you click on the icon  then the directory that contains the file will be expanded in the  sidebar and the name of the file will be highlighted in blue    It is also possible for a node to be linked to several files  In this case  the directory that  contains the first of the linked files will be opened when you click on the El icon and it is  highlighted in blue    All the other linked files are displayed at the bottom of the screen in the    Library     window    If you are not navigating through the tree  but through the files in the directory view   then the files that are linked to a node are indicated by a blue arrow     Click on the arrow to display the node that the file is linked to     S knowledge Tools   Mozilla Firefox ha   og    Datei Bearbeiten Ansicht Chronik Lesezeichen Extras Hilfe  Start Dossiers Knowledge Tutorials Datarooms Reporting Templates Options  Process Edit Scripts view Navigation Help  AOYX  B  sFAWOaRS    amp   TOO   2 Second assumption D      demo   Version 32             bw Directory       First assumption  lt  Cover pdf    fonts doc    A Ae    todo doc     gt  Directory B    TS    m    EZTIA module  true  Z mm    At vero eos et accusam et justo duo dolores et ea rebum  Files  Stet clita kasd gubergren  no sea takimata sanctus est  Lorem ipsum dolor sit amet  p   logik pdf          Fig   The sidebar with the linked dataroom files  If the file is linked to several nodes  then a selection window will open if you click on th
267. top of the screen and then on the  Stop  Server  button  You will receive a message when the server has been stopped    7  Click on the  Start Server  button and the server will restart  You will receive the  following message after the successful start of the server     Status  Server is    running        18 2 4  Accessing Log Files    During the operation of the LOGOS server  various log files are created that can be used  to analyse technical problems if they occur  In order to access log files  click on the     Logs    tab at the top of the screen  The existing log files will then be displayed in the       Log Files    window  Click on the name of a log file to open or download it     18 2 5  Creating Backups    If you create a full backup using the backup function  then all the contents that you have  created on your LOGOS installation  i e  kKnowledgeTools trees  scripts  datarooms   dossiers and dossier contents  processes  tutorials and templates  as well as users and    their access rights  will be saved in the backup           NOTE  The backup function secures all the relevant data of your server in a directory on  the same computer  However  you are responsible for the storage of the directory on a    backup data storage device  e g  a type drive              NOTE  Please note that although it is possible to continue working on the server while  the backup is being created  the backup process will have a considerable effect on the  performance of the system  Theref
268. torials  you must possess  the     Tutorial Admin     administrative access right  In any cases of doubt  please contact    your user administrator        If you are authorized to create new tutorials  then the  New Tutorial  button will be  displayed at the bottom of the window  In order to create a new tutorial  click on the  button and a dialog box will open  Start by entering a name for the new tutorial in the  dialog box and then select the knowledgeTool that you want to integrate in the tutorial  by using the selection list below it  All the knowledgeTools for which you possess at least    read access will be displayed in the list     If you are authorized to edit a tutorial  then the  Edit  button and the  x  button will be  displayed on the left  next to the name of the tutorial  Click on the  Edit  button next to  the name of a tutorial to edit it  Click on the LX  button next to the name of a tutorial to    delete it        knowledge Tools   Mozilla Firefox  Datei Bearbeiten Ansicht Chronik Lesezeichen Extras Hilfe    Start Dossiers Knowledge Tutorials Datarooms Reporting Templates Options A amp D    Tutorials    o a   a  ast chanaeva    New tutorial    Tutorial name  Demoturotial    knowledgeTool  demo    New tutorial          Fig   The    New Tutorial    dialog box for the creation of new tutorials    It is advisable to use knowledgeTools that do not contain any additional texts  e g     explanations  at the bottom of the screen     170          E knowledgeTools  
269. ture of the document that is to be created    Open the    Process    menu and click on    Create Document       If there are layout templates on your server  then a dialog box will appear and  you will be asked whether you want to create the document using a  reformatted   Standard template or using one of the layout templates that already exist on the  server  The layout templates will be displayed in the selection list  Select a  template and then click on the  Save  button    Depending on the security settings that you have configured  a pop up window  will now appear with the question     An ActiveX control element on this page is  possibly in conflict with other elements on this page  Do you want to allow this      Click on  Yes  in the window    Microsoft Word will now open and the document will be created there  If you have  used a process template for the creation of the process that the document  generation is based on  then this layout template will be used for the creation of  the document  Otherwise  a standard template will be used  You can now edit the    document according to your requirements  save it locally or print it in MS Word     Alternatively  you can also create documents on the basis of existing processes  In order    to do so  open an existing process  that belongs to a document generator knowledge    tree  and then follow the steps described above from step 3 to step 5     11 10 1  Editing Generated Documents    Generated documents can be edited in 
270. u have the option to save the document  conventionally on your local PC or network  However  you also have the option to save  the generated document in the dossier in which you created the process that the  document belongs to    In order to do so  do not save the document in the usual way  but click on the     Upload  amp  Close  button in the Word toolbar  see figure      Datei Bearbeiten Ansicht Einf  gen F    Et Upload  amp  Schliefien   O ce A oa    Fig   The  Upload  amp  Close  button    Microsoft Word will now close and the document will be saved in the associated dossier   In addition  a write protected copy of the process will also be created and saved under  the original process  see figure  with a version number  This makes it possible to    e later understand which entries in the tree the generation of the document was    based on  and    e again generate the exact same document from this write protected copy        Dossiers aarp ee  Pt   Name   Used template   Date   Author O O  0O     B   Dossier 14 11 2007 Doe  John  Oo El Letter Letter 22 11 2007 Doe  John    gt     Fig   A process with an associated document    A Word icon is displayed next to the write protected copy of the process  This icon  indicates that there is a document that belongs to the copy of the process  If you click on    the icon  the generated document will be opened in Microsoft Word     150      knowledgeTools    11 11  Working With Files    When using LOGOS  you have the option to uploa
271. u in the menu bar     Click on    Insert     Alternatively  you can click on the E icon in the toolbar   This  function is also available in the shortcut menu   The instance is now created     Open the    Properties    window     55      knowledgeTools    8  Using the    Properties    window  click on the parent node and determine how you  want it to be logically associated with the instance that has just been created  or    use the pie menu     5 14  Removing Nodes    The user also has the option to remove nodes from the tree structure  However  these  nodes are not deleted from the database  but can later be reinserted into the tree    structure     5 14 1  Detaching Nodes    The    Uncouple Node    option removes the node in question from the tree structure  In  this case  the node is not copied to the clipboard  but is moved to the recycle bin  In  addition  all the child nodes of the detached node are also removed from the tree    structure and moved to the recycle bin     Click on the node that you want to detach     2  Open the    Edit    menu in the menu bar     3  Click on    Uncouple Node     Alternatively  you can click on the AP icon in the    toolbar   This function is also available in the shortcut menu      5 14 2  Extract Node    The    Extract Node    option removes the node in question from the tree structure  In this  case  the node is not copied to the clipboard  but is moved to the recycle bin  Contrary to  when you detach a node  this option only has an 
272. ucture  If it is no longer possible to move an element to the left or    the right  then the corresponding icon will be disabled     10 4 3  Moving Text Blocks by Using Cut and Paste    Text blocks can only be moved within a section using the above described method   However  you can also move text blocks within the script     1  Select the text block that you want to move by clicking on it with the mouse     2  Click on the   icon     Click on the section where you want to paste the text block     4  Click on the    icon and the text block will be pasted below any existing text  blocks in the section  If you want to paste the text block above an existing text    block  then click on the corresponding text block before pasting it     10 4 4  Merging Text Blocks    You have the option to merge two consecutive text blocks into a single text block   In order to do so  please proceed as follows     1  Select the upper of the two text blocks by clicking on it once with the mouse     117      knowledgeTools    2  Click on the Al icon  The two text blocks will now be merged into a single  text block     10 4 5  Deleting Elements  Select the element  section or text block  that you want to delete by clicking on it with  the mouse  Click on the icon in the toolbar of the Script Editor and you will be asked    whether you really want to delete the selected element  Click on  OK  to delete the    element  Click on  Cancel  if you do not want to delete the element           NOTE  If you 
273. up  read access to the corresponding script  In order to grant the user  or user  group  the right to edit the script  a so activate the check box in the column  labelled    Edit       6  Finish by clicking on the  Save  button     You also have the option to grant or deny selected users  or user groups  the right to    read and or edit all scripts  In order to do so  simply click on either of the links        All Script Rights    or    Remove All     on the left hand side of the list under    Scripts        127          knowledgeTools    11  The Dossier Module    The results that are achieved with knowledgeTools are saved in processes  It is also  possible to dynamically generate documents on the basis of these processes    By using the Dossier Module  you have the option to create dossiers on the server for  customers or projects  to assign master data  e g  contact details  to these dossiers and  to save your results  i e  processes and generated documents  in these dossiers   Furthermore  you also have the option to store other files  e g  Word documents  Excel  charts  presentations or graphics in the dossiers    Besides the tiered system for the administration of access rights  the Dossier Module also  has an activation system  In the default version  dossier contents are only visible to  and  can only be used by  the user that created them  However  it is also possible to activate    some or all dossiers for editing and processing by other users     11 1  Configuring D
274. user logged into the system   the    End Date    column displays when the user logged out of the system   the    Duration in Seconds    column displays how long the user was online between  logging in and logging out   the last two columns display how many nodes the user clicked on during the    period that they were online     195         knowledgeTools    18  General Administration of the Server    The basic administration tasks include the starting  stopping and restarting of the server   the installation of patches  the creation and restoration of backups and the configuration  of the server  These tasks can be accomplished by using the LOGOS server console  and or the LOGOS web console  The LOGOS server console is only available in LOGOS    installations that are running on MS Windows     18 1  The LOGOS Server Console    The following functions are available in the server console   e Starting   Stopping the Server  e Editing the LOGOS Server Configuration  e Adding Administrators  e Changing User Passwords  e Installing Patches  e Creating Backups    e Restoring Backups    NOTE  Please note that the LOGOS server console is only available if LOGOS has been  installed on a computer that is running an MS Windows operating system  The LOGOS    server console can only be executed if the user account has administration rights     18 1 1  Starting   Stopping the Server    NOTE  You should only stop or restart the server if you are sure that there are no other  users working on
275. utton in the dialog box that  appears and the task window will then open  In this window  the deletion of the  dataroom will be displayed as a new task that is to be executed  Please click on  the  gt  icon to start the delete process  If you want to cancel the delete process   then please click on the M icon    After the successful deletion of the dataroom  the message     Completed  Successfully     will be displayed in the task window  Please then click on the T icon    to remove the successfully completed task from the task window     Navigation in the Dataroom    The data in the dataroom is stored in a hierarchical directory structure  as used by    Windows Explorer      In order to display the contents of a directory  click on the name of the directory with the    left mouse button  If the directory contains any files  then these will be displayed on the    right hand side of the screen     If the directory contains subdirectories  then a    plus    sign will be displayed in front of the    name of the directory  Click on it once to open the directory structure and to display the    subdirectories     If you move the mouse pointer over the name of the file  an information window will    appear with the properties of the respective file     The following properties will be displayed     Filename   Technical ID of the file   Application type of the file  e g  Word or Excel    Technical checksum of the file   Creation date of the file  when the file was originally created 
276. vailable      Access Node     Focus Node Green     Focus Node Red     Focus Node Not Checked     Show Slide   If you select the action     Access Node     then a new input field will appear on the  right  next to the selection list  Click on the input field and select the node that  you want to access at a predetermined time from the visual display of the tree   The actions     Focus Node Green        Focus Node Red    or    Focus Node Not Checked     always refer to the current node  i e  the last accessed node    If you select the action     Show Slide     then an additional selection list will appear  on the right  next to the drop down list  This list will display the PowerPoint slides  that you have previously uploaded to the server  Select the slide that you want to  display from this list    Click on  New Marker  to add more events to the script    Finish by clicking on the    Save    button below to save your script and the tutorial   The tutorial will immediately be available to all of the users that are authorized to    access the knowledgeTool referred to in the tutorial     Click on the     button to remove an event from the list     173    E knowledgeTools    14 4  Viewing Tutorials    All the tutorials that are available on the server  i e  the tutorials that you possess at  least read access for  are displayed in the    Tutorials    tab  Whether or not you are  authorized to view a tutorial  and consequently the list of tutorials   depends on whether  you posse
277. vel of a newly created law already exists  Click on the first    subheading and it will be marked by a blue bar     2  Click on the   l icon to insert a new structure level  New structure levels are  always added under the respective selected structure level   3  Enter the title of the new structure level in the window that opens and then click    on the  Save  button        knowledgeTools   Mozilla Firefox BAX    Datei Bearbeiten Ansicht Chronik Lesezeichen Extras Hilfe       Start Dossiers Knowledge Tutorials Datarooms Reporting Templates Options    Demo Demo  Demo Demo  englisch  publishedin OO Amending laws direct selection      fF  vao4pd wt Afveazit OG    Demo Demo             E Fertig    Fig   The editor for entering the contents of laws    You can always rename  delete or move individual structure levels     e In order to rename a structure level  select it by clicking on it with the mouse and    then click on the Ej icon     e In order to delete a structure level  select it by clicking on it with the mouse and    then click on the J icon  If you do this  then the selected structure level and all  the contents of the structure level will be deleted  However  structure levels and    contents that are below the selected level will not be deleted     91      knowledgeTools    Click on the M icon in order to delete the selected structure level with its  contents  as well as the subordinate structure levels and their contents   Structure levels may be moved both vertically
278. vent of any problems when working with LOGOS  you should first check whether  your workstation meets the necessary system requirements for working with LOGOS   This particularly applies with regard to the version of your web browser  the version of  Flash player that you have installed and the security settings of your web browser   The system requirements with regard to your web browser  Flash player and the  necessary security settings are described earlier in the User   s Manual    You should then check whether you possess the necessary access rights in order to  perform the required tasks  In any cases of doubt  please contact the administrator of  your server    If  in spite of meeting the system requirements  setting the right security settings and  possessing the necessary access rights  the problem still persists  the problem can  usually be resolved by reloading the LOGOS client in your web browser  In order to do    so  click on the    Reload    button in your browser or press the F5 key           NOTE  Please note that if you click on the    Reload    button  any data that has not yet  been saved will be lost  Any data that was already saved in a process can be accessed by    reopening the process        In certain cases  the internal reporting system of the LOGOS server will inform you of    problems  please refer to chapter 18 2 below      19 2  Reporting Problems    The LOGOS server has an internal reporting system that analyses any problems that  occur and then
279. verage expected value  as well as  exact values that have been entered and or calculated in the individual processes and    constitute the basis for the calculation of the average     Process analysis chart    Average expected value  Processes 1 006 305 33   2354 738 87      296 004 00   532 384 00 f    296 004 00    259 140 00  Expected values in         Fig   The diagram illustrating the expected values    The vertical    Processes    axis displays the number of existing processes numbered from 1  upwards  therefore  there are three processes in the example above   In addition to the  number of each process  the horizontal axis displays the expected value that has been  calculated in the corresponding process of the node  In the case of an exact expected  value  e g  EUR 10 000   the value is displayed as a single dot    The value can be derived from the horizontal    Expected Value in  Currency     axis  If   instead of an exact value  a range of possible values has been calculated  e g  EUR 5 000  to EUR 10 000   then these values will be displayed as two dots that are connected by a  line  The red dot represents the minimum expected value and the green dot represents  the maximum expected value  If you move the mouse pointer over the dots  then the    precise values will be displayed in a yellow tooltip     193      knowledgeTools    The two dotted lines at the opposite ends of the horizontal axis represent the minimum  and maximum expected values  Both values are also d
280. wledge tree with the help  of the logical colour marking system and then save these analyses as processes  Expected Values   Currency   This option is only available if the user has  previously set the application type of knowledgeTools to    Risk Analysis     If this is  the case  then users can use this option to determine whether  in addition to  entering and calculating probabilities  it should also be possible to enter values  In  addition  the selection list behind it can also be used to determine the currency  that is to be used in the knowledgeTools client and the corresponding analyses   The users can currently choose between the euro  the US dollar and the pound  sterling    Discussion Forum   Send articles as e mail to   If this option is activated   then the users of the knowledgeTool can also use the forum function  If an e mail    address has been entered in the input field  and a mail server has been    37      knowledgeTools    configured in the LOGOS server console   then all new forum contributions will  automatically be sent to this address by e mail    Instructions   If there is no text for a node with an    AND association     then the  working instructions can be used to display the alternative text of the child node  as a list in tabular form  in the text window of the child node in question    Link to acts   Citations from laws in the additional information texts are  automatically linked with the integrated Legal Database  in so far as the law in  que
281. y possible attached child nodes are also removed     Copy Node  copies the activated node to the clipboard  any possible attached    child nodes are not also copied     Copy Branch  copies the activated node  including all of its child nodes  to the    clipboard     60    o    B    E knowledgeTools    Insert  pastes the node s  that are in the clipboard behind the selected node   Memorise Node  creates an instance of the activated node in the clipboard   Insert Node Above  inserts the node in the clipboard above the selected node   Import Tree Section  imports a tree section from another knowledgeTool     Properties  opens the    Properties    window and displays the properties of the    activated node   Move Node Up  moves a node up one position within a tree section   Move Node Down  moves a node down one position within a tree section     Edit Input Fields  opens the dialog box for creating and editing input fields     61      knowledgeTools    6  Editing Additional Information With the Text Editor    Depending on the application type that you have selected in the    Technical Tree  Properties    window  you will have different categories of additional information available  to you  see chapter 3 1 3  This additional information may consist of texts  images or  links    The creation and editing of the additional information occurs using an online editor   i e  directly in the browser window and without the use of any additional software on the    part of the user     Syste
    
Download Pdf Manuals
 
 
    
Related Search
    
Related Contents
取扱説明書 - マックスレイ  Descargar    Diamond Multimedia BVU3500H  Briggs & Stratton 543200 User's Manual  みのりっ子No.27    Copyright © All rights reserved. 
   Failed to retrieve file